Marquardt C01B Remote Keyless Entry Device and Integrated Vehicular Receiver User Manual 2008 Dodge LC22 Challenger SRT8

Marquardt GmbH Remote Keyless Entry Device and Integrated Vehicular Receiver 2008 Dodge LC22 Challenger SRT8

User Manual

Challenger SRT8O W N E R ’ S M A N U A L2 0 0 82008 Challenger SRT881-226-0821 First Edition Printed in U.S.A.62713 08 DodgeChallenger.qxd:62713cov 12/20/07 2:42 PM Page 1
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADAWith respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the nameChrysler LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and thename Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefor.DRIVING AND ALCOHOLDrunken driving is one of the most frequent causes ofaccidents.Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with bloodalcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you aredrinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinkingdriver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.WARNING!Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Yourperceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,and your judgment is impaired when you have beendrinking. Never drink and then drive.This manual illustrates and describes the operation offeatures and equipment that are either standard or op-tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include adescription of features and equipment that are no longeravailable or were not ordered on this vehicle. Pleasedisregard any features and equipment described in thismanual that are not on this vehicle.Chrysler LLC reserves the right to make changes indesign and specifications, and/or make additions to orimprovements to its products without imposing anyobligation upon itself to install them on products previ-ously manufactured.Copyright © 2007 Chrysler LLC
TABLE OF CONTENTSSECTION PAGE1INTRODUCTION.............................................................32THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE...............................93UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE...............................714UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL...................................1455STARTING AND OPERATING.................................................2116WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES...............................................2797MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE...............................................2938MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES..................................................3459IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE..........................................35110INDEX....................................................................36112345678910
INTRODUCTIONCONTENTSmIntroduction ...........................4mHow To Use This Manual ..................4mWarnings And Cautions ...................6mVehicle Identification Number ...............6mVehicle Modifications/Alterations ............71
INTRODUCTIONThis Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis-tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaintyou with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Bookletand various customer-oriented documents. You areurged to read these publications carefully. Following theinstructions and recommendations in this manual willhelp assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be storedin the vehicle for convenient reference and remain withthe vehicle when sold, so that the new owner will beaware of all safety warnings.When it comes to service, remember that your authorizeddealer knows your vehicle best, has the factory-trainedtechnicians and genuine MOPARtparts, and is inter-ested in your satisfaction.HOW TO USE THIS MANUALConsult the Table of Contents to determine which sectioncontains the information you desire.The detailed Index at the back of this manual contains acomplete listing of all subjects.Consult the following table for a description of thesymbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughoutthis Owner’s Manual.4 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION 51
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONSThis Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against op-erating procedures that could result in an accident orbodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against proce-dures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If youdo not read this entire manual, you may miss importantinformation. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBERThe Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the leftfront corner of the instrument panel and is visible fromoutside of the vehicle through the windshield. Thisnumber also appears on the Automobile InformationDisclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, thevehicle registration, and the title. NOTE: It is illegal to remove the VIN.VIN Location6 INTRODUCTION
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONSWARNING!Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle couldseriously affect its roadworthiness and safety andmay lead to an accident resulting in serious injury ordeath.INTRODUCTION 71
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLECONTENTSmA Word About Your Keys ..................12▫Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) .............12▫FOB With Integrated Key.................13▫Ignition Key Removal ...................14▫Key-In-Ignition Reminder ................15mSentry Keyt...........................15▫Replacement Keys ......................16▫Customer Key Programming ..............17▫General Information ....................18mSecurity Alarm System ....................18▫Rearming Of The System .................18▫To Arm The System .....................19▫To Disarm The System ...................19mIlluminated Entry System ..................20mRemote Keyless Entry .....................21▫To Unlock The Doors ...................21▫To Lock The Doors .....................23▫Express Down Window Feature ............242
▫To Open The Trunk .....................25▫Using The Panic Alarm ..................25▫Programming Additional Transmitters ........25▫Transmitter Battery Service ...............25▫General Information ....................26mRemote Starting System ...................27▫How To Use Remote Start ................27mDoor Locks ............................29▫Manual Door Locks .....................29▫Power Door Locks .....................30mWindows .............................33▫Power Windows .......................33▫Wind Buffeting ........................34mTrunk Lock And Release ...................35mTrunk Safety Warning.....................36▫Trunk Emergency Release ................36mOccupant Restraints ......................37▫Lap/Shoulder Belts .....................38▫Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure .....42▫Seat Belt Pretensioners ...................43▫Enhanced Seat Belt Reminder System(BeltAlertt) ..........................43▫Automatic Locking Mode — If Equipped .....44▫Seat Belts And Pregnant Women ............45▫Seat Belt Extender ......................45▫Driver And Front Passenger SupplementalRestraint System (SRS) - Airbag ............4610 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫Event Data Recorder (EDR) ...............56▫Child Restraint ........................58mEngine Break-In Recommendations ...........67mSafety Tips ............................68▫Transporting Passengers .................68▫Lock Your Vehicle ......................68▫Exhaust Gas ..........................68▫Safety Checks You Should Make InsideThe Vehicle ..........................69▫Periodic Safety Checks You Should MakeOutside The Vehicle ....................70THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 112
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYSYour vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This systemconsists of a Fob with Integrated Key and a WirelessIgnition Node (WIN) with an integral ignition switch.You can insert the double-sided integrated key into theignition switch with either side up.Keyless Go FeatureThis vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Go feature,refer to Section 5 of this manual for more information.Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) operates similarly toan ignition switch. It has four operating positions, threeof which are detented and one spring-loaded. The de-tented positions are LOCK, ACC, and ON. The STARTposition is a spring-loaded momentary contact position.When released from the START position, the switchautomatically returns to the detented ON position.1 — LOCK2 — ACCESSORY3—ON4—START12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Fob With Integrated KeyThe Fob with Integrated Key operates the ignition switch.It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) trans-mitter and a valet key, which stores in the rear of the Fob.The valet key allows for entry into the vehicle should thebattery in the vehicle or the Fob go dead. The valet key isalso for locking the glove box. You can keep the valet keywith you when valet parking.To remove the valet key from the Fob, slide the mechani-cal latch at the top of the Fob sideways with your thumband then pull the key out of the Fob with your otherhand. NOTE: You can insert the double-sided valet key intothe lock cylinders with either side up.Valet Key RemovalTHINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 132
Ignition Key RemovalPlace the shift lever in PARK. Turn the key to the LOCKposition and then remove the key.NOTE: The power window switches, radio, powersunroof (if equipped), and ignition-powered power out-lets will remain active for up to 60 minutes after theignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Openingeither door will cancel this feature. The time for thisfeature is programmable. Refer to “Delay Power Off toAccessories Until Exit,” under “Personal Settings (Cus-tomer Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Ve-hicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4.WARNING!Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leavingunattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for anumber of reasons. A child or others could be seri-ously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the key in theignition. A child could operate power windows,other controls, or move the vehicle.CAUTION!An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Alwaysremove key from the ignition and lock all doorswhen leaving the vehicle unattended.14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Key-In-Ignition ReminderIf you open the driver’s door and the key is in theignition, a chime will sound to remind you to remove thekey.NOTE: The Key-In-Ignition reminder only soundswhen the ignition key is placed in the LOCK or ACCposition.SENTRY KEYTThe Sentry KeytImmobilizer System prevents unautho-rized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. Thesystem does not need to be armed or activated. Operationis automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is lockedor unlocked.The system uses the factory-mated Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter with integrated key and Wireless Igni-tion Node (WIN) to prevent unauthorized vehicle opera-tion. Therefore, only RKE transmitters that are pro-grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operatethe vehicle. The system will not allow the engine to crankif an invalid RKE transmitter is used to operate theignition switch.After turning the ignition switch to the ON position, theVehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will turn on forthree seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains onafter the bulb check, it indicates that there is a problemwith the electronics. This condition will result in theengine being shut off after two seconds.If the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light turns onduring normal vehicle operation (vehicle running forlonger than 10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault inthe electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle ser-viced as soon as possible.THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 152
NOTE:•The Sentry KeytImmobilizer System is not compat-ible with aftermarket remote starting systems. Use ofthese systems may result in vehicle starting problemsand loss of security protection.•Exxon/Mobil Speedpass™, additional RKE transmit-ters, or any other transponder-equipped componentson the same key chain will not cause a fault unless theadditional part is physically held against the trans-mitter being used to start the vehicle. Cell phones,pagers, or other RF electronics will not cause interfer-ence with this system.All of the RKE transmitters provided with your newvehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics.Replacement KeysNOTE: Only RKE transmitters that are programmed tothe vehicle electronics can be used to start and operatethe vehicle. Once a transmitter is programmed to avehicle, it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.CAUTION!Always remove the keys from the vehicle and lock alldoors when leaving the vehicle unattended.At the time of purchase, the original owner is providedwith a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number isrequired for authorized dealer replacement of RKE trans-mitters. Duplication of RKE transmitters may be per-formed at an authorized dealer or by using the CustomerKey Programming procedure. This procedure consists of16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
programming a blank transmitter to the vehicle electron-ics. A blank transmitter is one that has never beenprogrammed.NOTE: When having the Sentry KeytImmobilizerSystem serviced, bring all vehicle RKE transmitters withyou to the authorized dealer.Customer Key ProgrammingIf you have two valid RKE transmitters with integratedkeys, you can program new transmitters to the system byperforming the following steps:1. Insert the first valid integrated key into the ignitionswitch and turn the ignition switch to the ON position forat least three seconds, but no longer than 15 seconds.Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position andremove the first key.2. Insert the second valid integrated key and turn theignition switch to the ON position within 15 seconds.After 10 seconds, a chime will sound and the VehicleSecurity Alarm Indicator Light will begin to flash. Turnthe ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove thesecond key.3. Insert a blank integrated key into the ignition switchand turn the ignition switch to the ON position within 60seconds. After 10 seconds, a single chime will sound andthe Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will stopflashing, turn on again for three seconds, and then turnoff.The new integrated key is programmed. The RKE trans-mitter will also be programmed during this procedure.Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys. If youdo not have a programmed RKE transmitter with inte-grated key, contact your authorized dealer for details.THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 172
NOTE: If a programmed key is lost, see your authorizeddealer to have all remaining keys erased from the sys-tem’s memory. This will prevent the lost key fromstarting your vehicle. The remaining keys must then bereprogrammed. All vehicle keys must be taken to anauthorized dealer at the time of service to be repro-grammed.General InformationThe Sentry Keytsystem complies with FCC rules Part 15and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation issubject to the following conditions:•This device may not cause harmful interference.•This device must accept any interference that may bereceived, including interference that may cause undes-ired operation.SECURITY ALARM SYSTEMThe Vehicle Security Alarm System monitors the vehicledoors for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch forunauthorized operation. If something triggers the alarm,the system will prevent the vehicle from starting andprovide the following audible and visible signals: thehorn will pulse; the headlights will flash; the park lightswill flash; and the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Lightin the instrument cluster will flash.Rearming Of The SystemIf something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken todisarm it, the system will turn the horn off after threeminutes, turn all of the visual signals off after 15 minutes,and then the system will rearm itself.18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLENOTICE: This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du CanadaNOTICE: Changes or modifications made to this equipment not expressly approved by (manufacturer name) may void the FCC authorization to operate this equipment.NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: 1. Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. 2. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. 3. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. 4. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
To Arm The SystemRemove the key from the ignition switch and either pressa power door LOCK switch while the driver or passengerdoor is open or press the LOCK button on the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. After the last door isclosed, or if all doors are closed, the system will arm itselfin about 16 seconds. During that time, the Vehicle Secu-rity Alarm Indicator Light will flash. If it does notilluminate, the system is not arming. In addition, if youopen a door during the arming period, the system willcancel the arming process. If you wish to rearm thesystem after closing the door, you must repeat one of thepreviously-described arming sequences.To Disarm The SystemEither press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitteror insert a valid ignition key into the ignition switch andturn the key to the ON position.NOTE:•The driver’s door key cylinder and the TRUNK buttonon the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm thesystem.•The system remains armed during trunk entry. Press-ing the TRUNK button will not disarm the system. Ifsomeone enters the vehicle through the trunk, andopens any door, the alarm will sound.•When the system is armed, the interior power doorlock switches will not unlock the doors.THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 192
The Vehicle Security Alarm System is designed to protectyour vehicle; however, you can create conditions wherethe system will give you a false alarm. If one of thepreviously-described arming sequences has occurred, thesystem will arm regardless of whether you are in thevehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open adoor, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm thesystem.If the alarm system is armed and the battery becomesdisconnected, the system will remain armed when thebattery is reconnected. The exterior lights will flash, thehorn will sound, and the ignition will not start thevehicle. If this occurs, disarm the system.Tamper AlertIf something has triggered the system in your absence,the horn will sound three times when you disarm thesystem. Check the vehicle for tampering.ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEMThe courtesy lights will turn on when you press theUNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter or open any door.The lights will fade to off after about 30 seconds or theywill immediately fade to off once the ignition switch isturned ON from the LOCK position.NOTE:•None of the courtesy lights will operate if the dimmercontrol is in the “defeat” position (extreme downwardposition), unless the overhead map/reading lights areturned on manually.20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRYThe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) allows you to lock orunlock the doors, open the trunk, or activate the PanicAlarm from distances up to about 35 ft (11 m) using ahand-held radio transmitter. The transmitter need not bepointed at the vehicle to activate the system.NOTE: Inserting the Fob with Integrated Key into theignition switch disables all buttons on that transmitter;however, the buttons on the remaining transmitters willcontinue to work. Driving at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) andabove disables all transmitter buttons for all fobs.To Unlock The DoorsPress and release the UNLOCK button on the transmitteronce to unlock the driver’s door, or twice within fiveseconds, to unlock both doors. The turn signal lights willflash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The illuminatedentry system will also turn on.Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) TransmitterTHINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 212
Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors FirstThis feature lets you program the system to unlock eitherthe driver’s door or both doors on the first press of theUNLOCK button on the transmitter. Refer to “RemoteKey Unlock,” under “Personal Settings (Customer Pro-grammable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle Infor-mation Center (EVIC)” in Section 4.•When not using the EVIC, perform the followingsteps:1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmedtransmitter for at least four seconds, but no longer than10 seconds. Then, press and hold the UNLOCK buttonwhile still holding the LOCK button.2. Release both buttons at the same time.3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press-ing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the transmitter withthe ignition switch in the LOCK position and the keyremoved.4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature toits previous setting.NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the transmitterwhile you are inside the vehicle will activate the SecurityAlarm. Opening a door with the SecurityAlarm activatedwill cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK buttonto deactivate the Security Alarm.Flash Lights with Remote Key LockThis feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash whenthe doors are locked or unlocked with the transmitter.This feature can be turned on or turned off. Refer to“Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock,” under 9Personal22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Settings (Customer Programmable Features),” under“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Sec-tion 4.•When not using the EVIC, perform the followingsteps:1. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmedtransmitter for at least four seconds, but no longer than10 seconds. Then, press and hold the LOCK button whilestill holding the UNLOCK button.2. Release both buttons at the same time.3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press-ing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the transmitter withthe ignition switch in the LOCK position and the keyremoved.4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature toits previous setting.NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the transmitterwhile you are in the vehicle will activate the SecurityAlarm. Opening a door with the SecurityAlarm activatedwill cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK buttonto deactivate the Security Alarm.Turn Headlights On with Remote Key UnlockThis feature activates the headlights for up to 90 secondswhen the doors are unlocked with the transmitter. Thetime for this feature is programmable. Refer to “TurnHeadlights On with Remote Key Unlock,” under “Per-sonal Settings (Customer Programmable Features),” un-der “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” inSection 4.To Lock The DoorsPress and release the LOCK button on the transmitter tolock both doors. The turn signal lights will flash and thehorn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 232
Sound Horn with Remote Key LockThis feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doorsare locked with the transmitter. This feature can beturned on or turned off. Refer to “Sound Horn withRemote Key Lock,” under “Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle In-formation Center (EVIC)” in Section 4.•When not using the EVIC, perform the followingsteps:1. Press the LOCK button on a programmed transmitterfor at least four seconds, but no longer than 10 seconds.Then, press the PANIC button while still holding theLOCK button.2. Release both buttons at the same time.3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press-ing the LOCK button on the transmitter with the ignitionswitch in the LOCK position and the key removed.4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature toits previous setting.NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the transmitterwhile you are in the vehicle will activate the SecurityAlarm. Opening a door with the SecurityAlarm activatedwill cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK buttonto deactivate the Security Alarm.Express Down Window FeatureThis feature allows you to remotely lower both front doorwindows at the same time. To use this feature, press andrelease the UNLOCK button on the transmitter and thenimmediately press and hold the UNLOCK button untilthe windows lower to the level desired or until theylower completely.24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Open The TrunkPress the TRUNK button on the transmitter two timeswithin five seconds to open the trunk.Using The Panic AlarmTo turn the Panic Alarm feature ON or OFF, press andhold the PANIC button on the transmitter for at least onesecond and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, theheadlights and park lights will flash, the horn will pulseon and off, and the interior lights will turn on.The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unlessyou turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button asecond time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph (24km/h) or greater.NOTE:•The interior lights will turn off if you turn the ignitionswitch to the ACC or ON position while the PanicAlarm is activated. However, the exterior lights andhorn will remain on.•You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from thevehicle when using the transmitter to turn off thePanic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emittedby the system.Programming Additional TransmittersRefer to Sentry Keyt, “Customer Key Programming.”If you do not have a programmed transmitter, contactyour authorized dealer for details.Transmitter Battery ServiceThe recommended replacement battery is one CR2032battery.NOTE:•Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate•Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the backhousing or the printed circuit board.THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 252
1. Battery access is through a door located on the rear ofthe fob. Insert a small, flat blade screwdriver into the slotand gently pry open the access door.2. Remove and replace the batteries. Avoid touching thenew batteries with your fingers. Skin oils may causebattery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it withrubbing alcohol.3. Reposition the access door panel over the batteryopening and snap into place.General InformationThis device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules andRSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to thefollowing conditions:•This device may not cause harmful interference.•This device must accept any interference received,including interference that may cause undesired op-eration.NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap-proved by the party responsible for compliance couldvoid the user’s authority to operate the equipment.1 — Battery Access Door26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normaldistance, check for these two conditions:1. A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life ofthe battery is a minimum of three years.2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio stationtower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.REMOTE STARTING SYSTEMThis system uses the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) trans-mitter to start the engine conveniently from outside thevehicle while still maintaining security. The system has atargeted range of 328 ft (100 m).NOTE: The vehicle must be equipped with an auto-matic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.How To Use Remote StartAll of the following conditions must be met before theengine will remote start:•Shift lever in PARK•Doors closed•Hood closed•Trunk closed•Hazard switch off•Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)•Ignition key removed from ignition switch•Battery at an acceptable charge level, and•RKE PANIC button not pressed.THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 272
To Enter Remote Start ModePress and release the REMOTE START buttonon the RKE transmitter twice, within five sec-onds. The parking lights will flash and the hornwill honk twice (if programmed). Then, theengine will start and the vehicle will remain in theRemote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.NOTE:•The park lamps will turn on and remain on duringRemote Start mode.•For security, power window and power sunroof op-eration (if so equipped) are disabled when the vehicleis in the Remote Start mode.•The engine can be started two consecutive times (two15-minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However,the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON positionbefore you can repeat the start sequence for a thirdcycle.To Exit Remote Start Mode without Driving theVehicleAllow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.To Exit Remote Start Mode and Drive the VehicleBefore the end of the 15-minute cycle, press and releasethe UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlockthe doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (ifequipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle,insert the key into the ignition switch and turn the switchto the ON position.NOTE:•The ignition switch must be in the ON position inorder to drive the vehicle.•For vehicles equipped with the Electronic VehicleInformation Center (EVIC), the message “Insert Key/Turn To Run” will flash in the EVIC until you insertthe key. Once inserted, the message “Turn To Run”will flash in the EVIC until you turn the key to run.28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Turn Off the Engine While in Remote StartModePress and release the REMOTE START button one time.NOTE: To avoid inadvertent shut downs, the systemwill disable the one time press of the REMOTE STARTbutton for two seconds after receiving a valid RemoteStart request.DOOR LOCKSManual Door LocksTo lock each door, push the door lock plunger on eachdoor trim panel downward. To unlock each door, pull thedoor lock plunger on each door trim panel upward. If the door lock plunger is down when you shut the door,the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the key is notinside the vehicle before closing the door.Door Lock PlungerTHINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 292
WARNING!•For personal security and safety in the event of anaccident, lock the vehicle doors before you drive aswell as when you park and leave the vehicle.•When leaving the vehicle, always remove the keyfrom the ignition and lock your vehicle. Unsuper-vised use of vehicle equipment may cause severepersonal injuries and death.•Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leavingunattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for anumber of reasons. A child or others could beseriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the key inthe ignition. A child could operate power win-dows, other controls, or move the vehicle.Power Door LocksThe power door lock switch is located on each door trimpanel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.If you press the power door lock switch while the key isin the ignition, and any door is open, the power locks willnot operate. This prevents you from accidentally lockingPower Door Lock Switch30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
the key in the vehicle. Removing the key or closing thedoor will allow the locks to operate. If a door is open, thekey is in the ignition, and the ignition is in the LOCK orACC position, a chime will sound as a reminder toremove the key.Automatic Door LocksThe doors will lock automatically if all of the followingconditions are met:1. The Automatic Door Locks feature is enabled2. The transmission is in gear3. All doors are closed4. The throttle is pressed5. The vehicle speed is above 15 mph (24 km/h), and6. The doors were not previously locked using the powerdoor lock switch or Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) trans-mitter.Automatic Door Locks — If EquippedThe auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled byyour authorized dealer. See your authorized dealer forprogramming.Automatic Unlock Doors on ExitThe doors will unlock automatically if:1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en-abled2. The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speedreturned to 0 mph (0 km/h)3. The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK4. The driver door is opened5. The doors were not previously unlocked, and6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 312
Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit ProgrammingThe Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can beenabled or disabled. Refer to “Unlock Doors Automati-cally on Exit,” under “Personal Settings (Customer Pro-grammable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle Infor-mation Center (EVIC)” in Section 4.•When not using the EVIC, perform the followingsteps:1. Enter the vehicle and close all doors.2. Place the key in the ignition switch.3. Within 15 seconds, cycle the ignition switch betweenLOCK and ON and then back to LOCK four times endingup in the LOCK position. However, do not start theengine.4. Within 30 seconds, depress the power door UNLOCKswitch to unlock the doors.5. A single chime will indicate the completion of theprogramming.NOTE: If you do not hear the chime, it means that thesystem did not enter the programming mode and youwill need to repeat the procedure.6. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature toits previous setting.NOTE: Use theAutomatic Unlock Doors On Exit featurein accordance with local laws.32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WINDOWSPower WindowsThe window controls on the driver’s door control both ofthe door windows.There is a single window control on the passenger’s doortrim panel that operates the window on the passenger’sdoor. The window controls will operate only when theignition switch is in the ON or ACC position.NOTE: The door window will lower slightly if it isclosed completely when opening the door. The windowwill return to its fully closed position after closing thedoor. This action allows the door to open without resis-tance and prevents window and top seal damage.NOTE: You can remotely lower both the driver side andpassenger side windows at the same time. Refer to“Remote Keyless Entry/Express Down Window Feature”in this section.Power Window SwitchesTHINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 332
WARNING!Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in theignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattendedchildren, can become entrapped by the windowswhile operating the power window switches. Suchentrapment may result in serious injury or death.AUTO-Down FeatureThe driver’s door power window switch and passenger doorpower window switch on some models have an AUTO-down feature. Press the window switch to the second detent,release, and the window will go down automatically.To open the window part way, press the window switchto the first detent and release it when you want thewindow to stop.To stop the window from going all the way down duringthe AUTO-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.The power window switches will remain active for up to60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF.Opening either door will cancel this feature. The time forthis feature is programmable. Refer to “Delay Power OfftoAccessories Until Exit,” under “Personal Settings (Cus-tomer Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Ve-hicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4.Wind BuffetingWind buffeting can be described as the perception ofpressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in theears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with thewindows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certainopen or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs withone window open, then open the other window tominimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with thesunroof open, then adjust the sunroof opening to mini-mize the buffeting.34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASEThe trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle bypressing the Trunk Release button. The button is locatedon the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel.NOTE: The transmission must be in PARK before theswitch will operate.The trunk lid can be released from outside the vehicle bypressing the Trunk Release button on the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter twice within five seconds.With the ignition switch in the ON position, the TrunkOpen symbol will display in the instrument clusterindicating that the trunk is open. The odometer displaywill reappear once the trunk is closed.With the ignition switch in the LOCK position or the keyremoved from the ignition switch, the Trunk Open sym-bol will display until the trunk is closed.Trunk Release ButtonTHINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 352
TRUNK SAFETY WARNINGWARNING!Do not allow children to have access to the trunk,either by climbing into the trunk from outside, orthrough the inside of the vehicle. Always close thetrunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once inthe trunk, young children may not be able to escape,even if they entered through the rear seat. If trappedin the trunk, children can die from suffocation orheat stroke.Trunk Emergency ReleaseThe trunk of your vehicle is equipped with an emergencyrelease handle. It is located on the inside of the trunk lid,near the latch, and is coated so that it glows in a darkenedtrunk. Pull on the handle to open the trunk.Emergency Release36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTSSome of the most important safety features in yourvehicle are the restraint systems. These include the frontand rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers, thefront airbags for both the driver and front passenger, andthe supplemental side curtain airbags for the driver andpassengers seated next to a window. If you will becarrying children too small for adult-size belts, your seatbelts also can be used to hold infant and child restraintsystems.Please pay close attention to the information in thissection. It tells you how to use your restraint systemproperly to keep you and your passengers as safe aspossible.WARNING!In a collision, you and your passengers can suffermuch greater injuries if you are not properly buckledup. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or otherpassengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.Always be sure you and others in your vehicle arebuckled up properly.Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, evenon short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driverand cause a collision that includes you. This can happenfar away from home or on your own street.THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 372
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and theycan reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Someof the worst injuries happen when people are thrownfrom the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility ofejection and the risk of injury caused by striking theinside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle shouldbe belted at all times.Lap/Shoulder BeltsAll seating positions in your vehicle are equipped withlap/shoulder belts.The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock duringvery sudden stops or impacts. This feature allows theshoulder part of the belt to move freely with you undernormal conditions. However, in a collision, the belt willlock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of thevehicle or being thrown out.WARNING!•It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside oroutside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areasare more likely to be seriously injured or killed.•Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that isnot equipped with seats and seat belts.•Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seatbelt properly.•Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat belts aredesigned to go around the large bones of your body. These arethe strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of acollision best.•Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuriesin a collision much worse. You might suffer internal injuries,or you could even slide out of part of the belt. Follow theseinstructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep yourpassengers safe, too.•Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt.People belted together can crash into one another in an accident,hurting one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lapbelt for more than one person, no matter what their size.38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back andadjust the front seat.2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat.Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latchplate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the beltgo around your lap.Latch PlateTHINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 392
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latchplate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”WARNING!•A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protectyou properly. The lap portion could ride too high on yourbody, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle yourbelt into the buckle nearest you.•A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well. In asudden stop, you could move too far forward, increasing thepossibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.•A belt that is worn under your arm is very dangerous. Yourbody could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in acollision, increasing head and neck injury. A belt worn underthe arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs are not as strong asshoulder bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that yourstrongest bones will take the force in a collision.•A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect youfrom injury during a collision. You are more likely to hit yourhead in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt. Thelap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together.Latch Plate To Buckle40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below yourabdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull upa bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is tootight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snugbelt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in acollision.WARNING!•A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk ofinternal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t beat the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across yourabdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as pos-sible and keep it snug.•A twisted belt cannot do its job as well. In a collision,it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is straight.If you cannot straighten a belt in your vehicle, take it toyour authorized dealer and have it fixed.5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it iscomfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractorwill withdraw any slack in the belt.Removing Slack From BeltTHINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 412
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing toallow the belt to retract fully.WARNING!A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision andleave you with no protection. Inspect the belt systemperiodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Donot disassemble or modify the system. Seat beltassemblies must be replaced after a collision if theyhave been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,etc.).Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ProcedureUse the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/shoulder belt.1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to theanchor point.2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create afold that begins immediately above the latch plate.3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of thelatch plate.4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears thefolded webbing.42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Belt PretensionersThe seat belts for both front seating positions areequipped with pretensioning devices that are designed toremove any slack from the seat belts in the event of acollision. These devices improve the performance of theseat belt system by assuring that the belt is tight aroundthe occupant in a collision. Pretensioners work for all sizeoccupants, including those in child restraints.NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seatbelt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must beworn snugly and positioned properly.The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-straint Controller (ORC). (Refer to information on Air-bags in this section). Like the front airbags, the preten-sioners are single use items.After a collision that is severeenough to deploy the airbags and pretensioners, bothmust be replaced.Enhanced Seat Belt Reminder System (BeltAlertT)If the driver’s seat belt has not been buckled within 60seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed isgreater than 5 mph (8 km/h), the Enhanced WarningSystem (BeltAlertt) will alert the driver to buckle the seatbelt. The driver should also instruct all other occupants tobuckle their seat belts. Once the warning is triggered, theBeltAlerttwill continue to chime and flash the Seat BeltReminder Light for 96 seconds or until the driver’s seatbelt is buckled. The BeltAlerttwill be reactivated if thedriver’s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 secondsand the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).BeltAlerttProgrammingThe BeltAlerttcan be enabled or disabled by yourauthorized dealer or by performing the following steps:NOTE: Chrysler LLC does not recommend deactivatingthe BeltAlertt.THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 432
1. With all doors closed, and the ignition switch in anyposition except ON or START, buckle the driver’s seatbelt.2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do notstart the engine. Wait for the Seat Belt Reminder Light toturn off and then proceed to the next step.NOTE: You must perform the following steps within 60seconds of turning the ignition switch to the ON position.3. Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to theON position, unbuckle and then re-buckle the driver’sseat belt at least three times, ending with the seat beltbuckled.NOTE: Watch for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turnon while unbuckling the seat belt and turn off whilere-buckling the seat belt. It may be necessary to retractthe seat belt.4. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Asingle chime will sound to signify that you have success-fully completed the programming.The BeltAlerttcan be reactivated by repeating this pro-cedure.NOTE: When the BeltAlerttis deactivated, the Seat BeltReminder Light will continue to illuminate as long as thedriver’s seat belt is unbuckled.Automatic Locking Mode — If EquippedIn this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. However, the belt will still retract to remove slackin the shoulder belt. Use The Automatic Locking modeany time a child safety seat is installed in a seatingposition that has a seat belt with this feature. Children 12years old and younger should be properly restrained inthe rear seat whenever possible.44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
How to Engage the Automatic Locking Mode1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward untilthe entire belt is extracted.3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you willhere a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt isnow in the Automatic Locking mode.How to Disengage the Automatic Locking ModeUnbuckle the combination lap and shoulder belt andallow it to retract completely to disengage the AutomaticLocking mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emer-gency) locking mode.Seat Belts and Pregnant WomenWe recommend that pregnant women use the seat beltsthroughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe isthe best way to keep the baby safe.Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the beltacross the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.Keep the belt low so that it does not come across theabdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will takethe force if there is a collision.Seat Belt ExtenderIf a seat belt is too short even when fully extended andwhen the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if soequipped) is in its lowest position, your authorizeddealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. Thisextender should be used only if the existing belt is notlong enough. When it is not required, remove the ex-tender and store it.THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 452
WARNING!Using a seat belt extender when not needed canincrease the risk of injury in a collision. Only usewhen the seat belt is not long enough when it is wornlow and snug and in the recommended seating posi-tion. Remove and store the extender when notneeded.Driver and Front Passenger SupplementalRestraint System (SRS) - AirbagThis vehicle has front airbags for both the driver andfront passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraintsystems. The driver side front airbag is mounted in thecenter of the steering wheel. The passenger side frontairbag is mounted in the instrument panel, above theglove compartment. The words SRS AIRBAG are em-bossed on the airbag covers.NOTE: The front airbags are certified to the Federalregulations that allow less forceful deployment.1 — Airbags2 — Knee Bolsters46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The front airbags have a multistage inflator design. Thisallows the airbag to have different rates of inflation thatare based on collision severity.WARNING!•Do not put anything on or around the front airbagcovers or attempt to open them. You may damagethe airbags and you could be injured because theairbags are no longer functional. These protectivecovers for the airbag cushions are designed toopen only when the airbags are inflating.•Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster inany way.•Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolstersuch as alarm lights, stereos, citizens band radiosetc.This vehicle is also equipped with supplemental sidecurtain airbags (located above the side windows) toprotect the driver and passenger sitting next to a window.Their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG.NOTE: Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interiortrim, but they will open to allow airbag deployment.Side Window AirbagTHINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 472
WARNING!•Do not stack luggage or other cargo up highenough to block the location of the side curtainairbag. The area where the side curtain airbag islocated should remain free from any obstructions.•Do not have any accessory items installed whichwill alter the roof, including adding a sunroof toyour vehicle. Do not add roof racks that requirepermanent attachments (bolts or screws) for instal-lation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roofof the vehicle for any reason.NOTE: Do not use a clothing bar mounted to the coathooks in this vehicle. A clothing bar will impede theproper performance of the curtain airbags.Along with the seat belts, front airbags work with theinstrument panel knee bolsters to provide improvedprotection for the driver and front passenger. Side curtainairbags also work with seat belts to improve occupantprotection.While the seat belts are designed to protect you in manytypes of collisions, the front airbags will deploy inmoderate to severe frontal collisions. The supplementalside curtain airbag on the crash side of the vehicle willalso trigger in moderate to severe side collisions. How-ever, even in collisions where the airbags deploy, youneed the seat belts to keep you in the correct position forthe airbags to protect you properly.Here are some simple steps you can take to minimizethe risk of harm from a deploying airbag.1. Children 12 years old and younger should ride buck-led up in the rear seat.48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!Infants in rear-facing child restraints should NEVERride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passengerfront airbag. An airbag deployment could causesevere injury or death to infants in that position.2. Children who are not big enough to wear the vehicleseat belt properly should be secured in the rear seat inchild restraints or belt-positioning booster seats. (Refer toinformation on Child Restraint in this section.)3. Older children who do not use child restraints orbelt-positioning booster seats should ride properly buck-led up in the rear seat. Never allow children to slide theshoulder belt behind them or under their arm.4. If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the frontpassenger seat because the vehicle is crowded, move theseat as far back as possible and use the proper childrestraint. (Refer to information on Child Restraint in thissection.)5. You should read the instructions provided with yourchild restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.6. All occupants should use their seat belts properly.7. The driver and front passenger seats should be movedback as far as practical to allow the airbags time to inflate.8. Do not lean against the door, as the airbags will inflateforcefully into the space between you and the door.9. If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to bemodified to accommodate a disabled person, contact theCustomer Center. Phone numbers are provided in the 9IfYou Need Customer Assistance9section.THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 492
WARNING!•Relying on the airbags alone could lead to moresevere injuries in a collision. The airbags workwith your seat belt to restrain you properly. Insome collisions, the airbags won’t deploy at all.Always wear your seat belts even though you haveairbags.•Being too close to the steering wheel or instrumentpanel during airbag deployment could cause seri-ous injury. Airbags need room to inflate. Sit back,comfortably extending your arms to reach thesteering wheel or instrument panel.•This vehicle has supplemental side curtain air-bags, and they need room to inflate. Do not leanagainst the door or window. Sit upright in thecenter of the seat.Airbag System ComponentsThe airbag system consists of the following:•Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)•Side Remote Acceleration Sensors•Side Door Pressure Sensors•Airbag Warning Light•Driver Airbag•Front Passenger Airbag•Supplemental Side Curtain Airbags above Side Win-dows•Steering Wheel and Column•Instrument Panel•Interconnecting Wiring•Seat Belt Reminder Light50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•Knee Impact Bolsters•Front Acceleration Sensors•Driver and Front Passenger Seat Belt PretensionersHow the Airbag System Works•The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determinesif a frontal collision is severe enough to require theairbags to inflate. The front airbag inflators are de-signed to provide different rates of airbag inflationfrom direction provided by the ORC. The ORC will notdetect rollover.•The ORC also determines if a side impact is severeenough to deploy the supplemental side curtain airbagas required for each type of impact.•The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronicparts of the system whenever the ignition switch is inthe START or ON position. These include all of theitems listed above except the knee bolster, the instru-ment panel, and the steering wheel and column. If thekey is in the LOCK position, in the ACC position, ornot in the ignition, the airbags are not on and they willnot inflate.•The ORC also turns on the Airbag WarningLight in the instrument panel for six to eightseconds as a self-check when the ignition isfirst turned on. After the self-check, theAirbag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detectsa malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on theAirbag Warning Light either momentarily or continu-ously. A single chime will sound if the light comes onagain after initial start-up.THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 512
WARNING!Ignoring the AIRBAG Warning Light in your instru-ment panel could mean you won’t have the airbags toprotect you in a collision. If the light does not comeon, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comeson as you drive, have the airbag system checked rightaway.•The Driver and Front Passenger Airbag/InflatorUnits are located in the center of the steering wheeland the passenger side of the instrument panel. Whenthe ORC detects a collision requiring the airbags, itsignals the inflator units. A large quantity of nontoxicgas is generated to inflate the front airbags. Differentairbag inflation rates may be possible based on colli-sion severity. The steering wheel hub trim cover, andthe upper passenger side of the instrument panelseparate and fold out of the way as the bags inflate totheir full size. The bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70milliseconds. This is about half of the time that it takesto blink your eyes. The bags then quickly deflate whilehelping to restrain the driver and front passenger. Thedriver front airbag gas is vented through vent holes inthe sides of the airbag. The passenger front airbag gasis vented through vent holes in the sides of the airbag.In this way, the airbags do not interfere with yourcontrol of the vehicle.•The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees ofthe driver and the front passenger and position every-one for the best interaction with the front airbag.52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•The Supplemental Side Impact SRS Side CurtainAirbags are designed to activate only in certain sidecollisions. When the ORC detects a collision requiringthe side curtain airbag to inflate, it signals the inflatorson the crash side of the vehicle. A quantity of nontoxicgas is generated to inflate the side curtain airbag. Theinflating side curtain airbag pushes the outside edge ofthe headliner out of the way and covers the window.The airbag inflates in about 30 milliseconds (aboutone-quarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes)with enough force to injure you if you are not beltedand seated properly, or if items are positioned in thearea where the side curtain airbag inflates. This espe-cially applies to children. The side curtain airbag isonly about 3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick when it is inflated.If a Deployment OccursThe airbag system is designed to deploy when the ORCdetects a moderate-to-severe collision to help restrain thedriver and front passenger and then to immediately deflate.NOTE:A frontal collision that is not severe enough toneed airbag protection will not activate the system. Thisdoes not mean something is wrong with the airbag system.If you do have a collision that deploys the airbags, any orall of the following may occur:•The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra-sions and/or skin reddening to the driver and frontpassenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. Theabrasions are similar to friction rope burns or thoseyou might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasiumfloor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.However, if you haven’t healed significantly within afew days or if you have any blistering, see your doctorimmediately.•As the airbags deflate, you may see some smoke-likeparticles. The particles are a normal by-product of theprocess that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbagTHINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 532
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throatirritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,see your doctor. If these particles settle on yourclothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instruc-tions for cleaning.•It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after theairbags have been deployed. If you are involved inanother collision, the airbags will not be in place toprotect you.WARNING!Deployed airbags cannot protect you in another col-lision. Have the airbags replaced by an authorizeddealer as soon as possible.Enhanced Accident Response SystemIn the event of an impact that causes airbag deployment,with the vehicle stopped, and the vehicle communicationnetwork intact, and the power intact, the EnhancedAccident Response System performs the following func-tions:•Cuts off fuel to the engine.•Flashes hazard lights.•Turns on the interior lights, which remain on as long asthe battery has power or until the ignition key isremoved.•Unlocks the doors automatically.NOTE: The interior lights can only be deactivated if thekey is removed from the ignition switch or the vehicle isdriven.54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Maintaining Your Airbag SystemWARNING!•Modifications to any part of the airbag system couldcause it to fail when you need it. You could be injuredbecause the airbags are not there to protect you. Donot modify the components or wiring, includingadding any kind of badges or stickers to the steeringwheel hub trim cover or the upper passenger side ofthe instrument panel. Do not modify the frontbumper, vehicle body structure, or frame.•You need proper knee impact protection in acollision. Do not mount or locate any aftermarketequipment on or behind the knee impact bolster.•It is dangerous to try to repair any part of theairbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone whoworks on your vehicle that it has airbags.NOTE:Perchlorate Material — special handling mayapply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.Airbag Warning LightYou will want to have the airbags ready toinflate for your protection in an impact. Whilethe airbag system is designed to be mainte-nance free, if any of the following occurs, havean authorized dealer service the system promptly:•TheAirbag Warning Light does not come on or flickersduring the six to eight seconds when the ignitionswitch is first turned ON.•The light remains on or flickers after the six to eightsecond interval.•The light flickers or comes on and remains on whiledriving.THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 552
Event Data Recorder (EDR)In the event of an accident, your vehicle is designed torecord up to five seconds of specific vehicle data param-eters (see the following list) in an event data recorderprior to the moment of airbag deployment, or neardeployment, and up to a quarter second of high-speeddeceleration data during and/or after airbag deploy-ment. EDR data are ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys,or nearly deploys, and are otherwise unavailable.NOTE:1.A near-deployment event occurs when the airbag sensordetects severe vehicle deceleration usually indicative of acrash, but not severe enough to warrant airbag deployment.2. Under certain circumstances, EDR data may not berecorded (e.g., loss of battery power).In conjunction with other data gathered during a com-plete accident investigation, the electronic data may beused by Chrysler LLC and others to learn more about thepossible causes of crashes and associated injuries in orderto assess and improve vehicle performance. In additionto crash investigations initiated by Chrysler LLC, suchinvestigations may be requested by customers, insurancecarriers, government officials, and professional crashresearchers, such as those associated with universities,and with hospital and insurance organizations.In the event that an investigation is undertaken byChrysler LLC (regardless of initiative), the company or itsdesignated representative will first obtain permission ofthe appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle (usuallythe vehicle owner or lessee) before accessing the elec-tronic data stored, unless ordered to download data by acourt with legal jurisdiction (i.e., pursuant to a warrant).Acopy of the data will be provided to the custodial entityupon request. General data that does not identify par-ticular vehicles or crashes may be released for incorpo-ration in aggregate crash databases, such as those main-tained by the U.S. government and various states. Data of56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
a potentially sensitive nature, such as would identify aparticular driver, vehicle, or crash, will be treated confi-dentially. Confidential data will not be disclosed byChrysler LLC to any third party except when:1.Used for research purposes, such as to match data witha particular crash record in an aggregate database, providedconfidentiality of personal data is thereafter preserved,2. Used in defense of litigation involving a Chrysler LLCproduct,3. Requested by police under a legal warrant, or4. Otherwise required by law.Data Parameters that May Be Recorded:•Diagnostic trouble code(s) and warning light status forelectronically-controlled safety systems, including theairbag system•Airbag disable light status (if equipped)•9Time9of airbag deployment (in terms of ignitioncycles and vehicle mileage)•Airbag deployment level (if applicable)•Impact acceleration and angle•Seat belt status•Brake status (service and parking brakes)•Accelerator status (including vehicle speed)•Engine control status (including engine speed)•Transmission gear selection•Cruise control status•Traction/stability control status•Tire Pressure Monitoring System status (if equipped)THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 572
Child RestraintEveryone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all thetime, including babies and children. Every state in theUnited States and all Canadian provinces require thatsmall children ride in proper restraint systems. This is thelaw, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.Children 12 years and younger should ride properlybuckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crashstatistics, children are safer when properly restrained inthe rear seats rather than in the front.WARNING!In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby,can become a missile inside the vehicle. The forcerequired to hold even an infant on your lap couldbecome so great that you could not hold the child, nomatter how strong you are. The child and others couldbe badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicleshould be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.There are different sizes and types of restraints forchildren from newborn size to the child almost largeenough for an adult safety belt. Always check the childseat Owner’s Manual to ensure you have the correct seatfor your child. Use the restraint that is correct for yourchild.Infants and Child Restraints•Safety experts recommend that children riderearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at leastone year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two typesof child restraints can be used rearward-facing, infantcarriers and convertible child seats.•The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in thevehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh upto about 20 lbs (9 kg). Convertible child seats can beused either rearward-facing or forward-facing in thevehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higherweight limit in the rearward-facing direction than58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facingby children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) but areless than one year old. Both types of child restraints areheld in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or theLATCH child restraint anchorage system. Refer to“LATCH — Child Seat Anchorage System (LowerAnchors and Tether for CHildren)” in this section.•Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used inthe front seat of a vehicle with the front passengerairbag unless the airbag is turned off. An airbagdeployment could cause severe injury or death toinfants in this position.Older Children and Child RestraintsChildren who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who areolder than one year can ride forward-facing in thevehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible childseats used in the forward-facing direction are for childrenwho weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg) and who are olderthan one year. These child seats are also held in thevehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH childrestraint anchorage system. Refer to “LATCH — ChildSeat Anchorage System (Lower Anchors and Tether forCHildren)” in this section.The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weighingmore than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small to fitthe vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child cannot sitwith knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while thechild’s back is against the seatback, they should use abelt-positioning booster seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by thelap/shoulder belt.THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 592
Children too Large for Booster SeatsChildren who are large enough to wear the shoulder beltcomfortably and whose legs are long enough to bendover the front of the seat when their back is against theseatback should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.•Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.•The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snugas possible.•Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming orslouching can move the belt out of position.•If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move thechild closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow achild to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behindtheir back.NOTE: For additional information, refer towww.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK.WARNING!•Improper installation can lead to failure of aninfant or child restraint. It could come loose in acollision. The child could be badly injured orkilled. Follow the manufacturer’s directions ex-actly when installing an infant or child restraint.•A rearward-facing child restraint should only beused in a rear seat. A rearward-facing child re-straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploy-ing passenger airbag, which may cause severe orfatal injury to the infant.Here are some tips on getting the most out of your childrestraint:•Before buying any restraint system, make sure that ithas a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Standards. We also recommend that you make surethat you can install the child restraint in the vehiclewhere you will use it before you buy it.•The restraint must be appropriate for your child’sweight and height. Check the label on the restraint forweight and height limits.•Carefully follow the instructions that come with therestraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it maynot work when you need it.•Buckle the child into the seat according to the childrestraint manufacturer’s directions.•When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in thevehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop orcollision, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks andcause serious personal injury.LATCH — Child Seat Anchorage System (LowerAnchors and Tether for CHildren)Your vehicle’s rear seat is equipped with the childrestraint anchorage system called LATCH. The LATCHsystem provides for the installation of the child restraintwithout using the vehicle’s seat belts, instead securingthe child restraint using lower anchorages and uppertether straps from the child restraint to the vehiclestructure.LATCH-compatible child restraint systems are now avail-able. However, because the lower anchorages are to beintroduced over a period of years, child restraint systemshaving attachments for those anchorages will continue tohave features for installation using the vehicle’s seatbelts. Child restraints having tether straps and hooks forconnection to the top tether anchorages have been avail-able for some time. For some older child restraints, manychild restraint manufacturers offer add-on tether strapTHINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 612
kits or retrofit kits. You are urged to take advantage of allthe available attachments provided with your child re-straint in any vehicle.All three rear-seating positions have lower anchoragesthat are capable of accommodating LATCH-compatiblechild seats. You should NEVER install LATCH-compatible child seats so that two seats share a commonlower anchorage. If installing child seats in adjacentrear-seating positions, or if your child restraints are notLATCH-compatible, install the restraints using the vehi-cle’s seat belts.Installing the LATCH-Compatible Child RestraintSystemWe urge you to follow the manufacturer’s directionscarefully when installing your child restraint. Not allchild restraint systems will be installed as described here.LATCH Anchorages62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Again, carefully follow the installation instructions thatare provided with the child restraint system.The rear seat lower anchorages are round barslocated at the rear of the seat cushion where itmeets the seatback and are just visible whenyou lean into the rear seat to install the childrestraint. You will easily feel them if you run your fingeralong the intersection of the seatback and seat cushionsurfaces.In addition, there are tether strap anchoragesbehind each rear seating position located in thepanel between the rear seatback and the rearwindow. These tether strap anchorages areunder a plastic cover with this symbol on it.Many, but not all restraint systems will be equipped withseparate straps on each side, with each having a hook orconnector for attachment to the lower anchorage and ameans of adjusting the tension in the strap. Forward-facing toddler restraints and some rear-facing infantrestraints will also be equipped with a tether strap, ahook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and ameans of adjusting the tension of the strap.You will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps andon the tether strap so that you can more easily attach thehooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages. Next,attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of theseatcover material. Then rotate the tether anchoragecover directly behind the seat where you are placing thechild restraint and attach the tether strap to the anchor-age, being careful to route the tether strap to provide themost direct path between the anchor and the childrestraint. Finally, tighten all three straps as you push thechild restraint rearward and downward into the seat,removing slack in the straps according to the childrestraint manufacturer’s instructions.THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 632
NOTE:•Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into theopening between the seatbacks as you remove slack inthe strap.•When using the LATCH attaching system to install achild restraint, please ensure that all seat belts notbeing used for occupant restraints are stowed and outof reach of children. It is recommended that beforeinstalling the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so theseat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out ofreach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the childrestraint installation, instead of tucking the seat beltbehind the child restraint, route the seat belt throughthe child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Thisshould stow the seat belt out of the reach of aninquisitive child. Remind all children in the vehiclethat the seat belts are not toys and should not beplayed with, and never leave your child unattended inthe vehicle.WARNING!Improper installation of a child restraint to theLATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant orchild restraint. The child could be badly injured orkilled. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactlywhen installing an infant or child restraint.Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle SeatBeltThe passenger seat belts are equipped with either cinch-ing latch plates or automatic locking retractors, which aredesigned to keep the lap portion tight around the childrestraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip.Pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap/shoulderbelt will tighten the belt. The cinching latch plate will64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
keep the belt tight; however, any seat belt system willloosen with time, so check the belt occasionally and pullit tight if necessary.The seat belt must be in the Automatic Locking mode inorder to enable a child restraint to be tightly installed.Refer to “Automatic Locking Mode” in this section. Alocking clip should not be necessary once the automaticlocking feature is enabled. Position the shoulder and lapbelt on the child restraint. The automatic locking retractoris activated by first attaching the child seat, then pullingall of the webbing out of the retractor, then allowing thewebbing to retract back into the retractor. Tighten web-bing. To release, simply unbuckle the seat belt by de-pressing the button, allowing the webbing to retract intothe retractor.In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening thelap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because thebuckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path openingon the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate from thebuckle and twist the short buckle end belt several timesto shorten it. Insert the latch plate into the buckle with therelease button facing out.If the belt still cannot be tightened, or if pulling andpushing on the restraint loosens the belt, you may needto do something more. Disconnect the latch plate fromthe buckle, turn the buckle around, and insert the latchplate into the buckle again. If you still cannot make thechild restraint secure, try a different seating position.THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 652
To attach a child restraint tether strap:1. Rotate the cover over the anchor directly behind theseat where you are placing the child restraint.2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct pathfor the strap between the anchor and the child seat.3.Attach the tether strap hook (A) of the child restraint tothe anchor (B) and remove slack in the tether strapaccording to the child restraint manufacturer’s instruc-tions.NOTE: Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into theopening between the seatbacks as you remove slack inthe strap.WARNING!An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead toincreased head motion and possible injury to thechild. Use only the anchor positions directly behindthe child seat to secure a child restraint top tetherstrap.Tether Strap Mounting66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Transporting PetsAirbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possiblyinjured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or ina collision.Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnessesor pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONSA long break-in period is not required for the drivetrain(engine, transmission, and rear axle) in your new vehicle.Drive moderately during the first 500 mi (800 km). Afterthe initial 60 mi (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80or 90 km/h) are desirable.While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within thelimits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.However, wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear canbe detrimental and should be avoided.The engine oil, transmission fluid, and axle lubricantinstalled at the factory is high-quality and energy-conserving. Oil, fluid, and lubricant changes should beconsistent with anticipated climate and conditions underwhich vehicle operations will occur. The recommendedviscosity and quality grades is shown in Section 7.CAUTION!Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oilin the engine or damage may result.NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during itsfirst few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. Thisshould be considered as a normal part of the break-in andnot interpreted as an indication of difficulty.THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 672
SAFETY TIPSTransporting PassengersNEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGOAREA.WARNING!It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, peopleriding in these areas are more likely to be seriouslyinjured or killed.Do not allow people to ride in any area of yourvehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat andusing a seat belt properly.Lock Your VehicleAlways remove the key from the ignition and lock alldoors when leaving the vehicle unattended, even in yourown driveway or garage. Try to park your vehicle in awell-lit area and never invite theft by leaving articles ofvalue exposed.Exhaust GasWARNING!•Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They containcarbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless andodorless. Breathing it can make you unconsciousand can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing(CO) follow these safety tips.68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confinedareas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in orout of the area.If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the enginerunning, adjust your heating or cooling controls to forceoutside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.If you are required to drive with the trunk open, makesure that all windows are closed and the climate controlblower switch is set at high speed. DO NOT use therecirculation mode.The best protection against carbon monoxide entry intothe vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaustsystem.Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaustsystem, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside thevehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle isdamaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Openseams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumesto seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raisedfor lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.Safety Checks You Should Make Inside TheVehicleSeat BeltsInspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replacedimmediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after acollision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced aftera collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding beltor retractor condition, replace the belt.THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 692
Airbag Warning LightThe light should come on and remain on for six to eightseconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is firstturned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see yourauthorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comeson while driving, have the system checked by an autho-rized dealer.DefrosterCheck operation by selecting the defrost mode and placethe blower control on high speed. You should be able tofeel the air directed against the windshield. See yourauthorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoper-able.Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make OutsideThe VehicleTiresExamine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wearpatterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objectslodged in the tread. Inspect the tread and sidewall forcuts and cracks. Check the wheel nuts for tightness.Check the tires (including spare) for proper pressure.LightsHave someone observe the operation of exterior lightswhile you work the controls. Check turn signal and highbeam indicator lights on the instrument panel.Door LatchesCheck for positive closing, latching, and locking.Fluid LeaksCheck area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasolinefumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, orbrake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should belocated and corrected immediately.70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLECONTENTSmMirrors ...............................75▫Automatic Dimming Inside Mirror ..........75▫Outside Mirrors .......................75▫Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature —If Equipped ..........................76▫Power Remote Control Mirrors .............76▫Heated Remote Control Mirrors —If Equipped ..........................77▫Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped ....77mHands-Free Communication (UConnectt)—If Equipped ............................78▫Operation ............................80▫Phone Call Features ....................87▫UConnecttSystem Features ...............89▫Advanced Phone Connectivity .............94▫Things You Should Know About YourUConnecttSystem .....................96▫General Information ...................1043
mVoice Recognition System — If Equipped ......104▫Voice Recognition System (VR) Operation ....104▫Commands ..........................105▫Voice Training ........................108mSeats ................................109▫Easy Entry Seats ......................109▫Power Seats .........................109▫Front Seat Back Recline .................110▫Lumbar Support ......................111▫Head Restraints ......................111▫Heated Seats ........................112▫Folding Rear Seat — If Equipped ..........113mTo Open And Close The Hood .............114mLights ...............................116▫Headlight Switch .....................116▫Automatic Headlights — If Equipped .......117▫Headlights On With Wipers(Available With Auto Headlights Only) ......117▫Headlight Time Delay ..................117▫Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped .....118▫Lights-On Reminder ...................118▫Fog Lights ..........................118▫Multifunction Control Lever ..............119▫Overhead Console Map/Reading Lights .....120▫Interior Lights .......................12172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
mWindshield Wipers And Washers ............122▫Intermittent Wiper System ...............122▫Mist Feature .........................123▫Windshield Washers ...................123▫Headlights On With Wipers(Available With Auto Headlights Only) ......124▫Adding Washer Fluid ..................124mTilt/Telescoping Steering Column ...........125mElectronic Speed Control ..................126▫Electronic Speed Control Operation ........126▫To Activate ..........................127▫To Set At A Desired Speed ...............127▫To Deactivate ........................127▫To Resume Speed .....................128▫To Vary The Speed Setting ...............128▫To Accelerate For Passing ...............128mOverhead Console ......................129▫Courtesy/Reading Lights ................129▫Sunglasses Storage ....................130mGarage Door Opener — If Equipped .........130▫Programming HomeLinkt...............131▫Gate Operator/Canadian Programming .....134▫Using HomeLinkt.....................134▫Reprogramming A Single HomeLinktButton .............................135▫Security ............................135UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 733
▫Troubleshooting Tips ...................135▫General Information ...................136mPower Sunroof — If Equipped .............136▫Opening Sunroof - Manually .............137▫Opening Sunroof - Express ..............137▫Closing Sunroof - Manually ..............137▫Closing Sunroof - Express ...............138▫Pinch Protect Feature ...................138▫Pinch Protect Override .................138▫Venting Sunroof - Express ...............138▫Sunshade Operation ...................139▫Wind Buffeting .......................139▫Sunroof Maintenance ...................139▫Ignition Off Operation ..................139▫Sunroof Fully Closed ...................139mElectrical Power Outlets ..................140▫Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off .......141mCupholders ...........................142▫Front Cupholders .....................142▫Rear Cupholders ......................142mConsole Features .......................143▫Sliding Center Console Armrest ...........143▫Console Storage ......................143mRear Window Features ...................144▫Rear Window Defroster .................14474 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORSAutomatic Dimming Inside MirrorThis mirror automatically adjusts for annoying headlightglare from vehicles behind you. You can turn the featureon or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror.Alight next to the button will illuminate to indicate whenthe dimming feature is activated.CAUTION!To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, neverspray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe themirror clean.Outside MirrorsTo receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slightoverlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror.NOTE: The passenger-side convex outside mirror willgive a much wider view to the rear, and especially of thelane next to your vehicle.Automatic Dimming MirrorUNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 753
WARNING!Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger-sideconvex mirror will look smaller and farther awaythan they really are. Relying too much on yourpassenger-side convex mirror could cause you tocollide with another vehicle or other object. Use yourinside mirror when judging the size or distance of avehicle seen in the passenger-side convex mirror.Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature — If EquippedSome models have exterior mirrors that are hinged. Thehinge allows the mirror to pivot forward and rearward toresist damage. The hinge has three detent positions, fullforward, full rearward, and normal.Power Remote Control MirrorsThe power mirror switch is located on the driver’s doortrim panel next to the power door lock switch. A rotaryknob selects the left mirror, right mirror, or off position.After selecting a mirror, move the knob in the samedirection you want the mirror to move. Use the center offposition to guard against accidentally moving a mirrorposition.76 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Heated Remote Control Mirrors — If EquippedThese mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This featureis activated whenever you turn on the Electric RearWindow Defroster.Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If EquippedAn illuminated vanity mirror is on the sun visor. To usethe mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and swing themirror cover upward. The light turns on automatically.Closing the mirror cover turns off the light.Power Mirror ControlIlluminated Vanity MirrorUNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 773
HANDS-FREE COMMUNICATION (UConnectT)—IF EQUIPPEDNOTE:The sales code RER, REN and REU radios containan integrated Hands-Free Communication (UConnectt)system. Refer to your “Navigation User’s Manual” forUConnecttsystem operating instructions for these radios.UConnecttis a voice-activated, hands-free, in-vehicle com-munications system. UConnecttallows you to dial a phonenumber with your cellular phone using simple voicecommands (e.g., 9Call” {“Mike” {”Work9or 9Dial” {“248-555-12129). Your cellular phone’s audio is transmittedthrough your vehicle’s audio system; the system willautomatically mute your radio when using the UConnecttsystem.NOTE: The UConnecttsystem requires a cellular phoneequipped with the Bluetootht9Hands-Free Profile,9Ver-sion 0.96 or higher. See the UConnecttwebsite forsupported phones.NOTE: For UConnecttcustomer support, visit thefollowing websites:•www.chrysler.com/uconnect•www.dodge.com/uconnect•www.jeep.com/uconnect•or call 1–877–855–8400UConnecttallows you to transfer calls between thesystem and your cellular phone as you enter or exit yourvehicle and enables you to mute the system’s microphonefor private conversation.The UConnecttphonebook enables you to store up to 32names, with four numbers per name. Each language hasa separate 32-name phonebook accessible only in thatlanguage. This system is driven through your Bluetootht“Hands-Free profile” cellular phone. UConnecttfeaturesBluetoothttechnology - the global standard that enables78 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
different electronic devices to connect to each otherwithout wires or a docking station, so UConnecttworksno matter where you stow your cellular phone (be it yourpurse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone isturned on and has been paired to the vehicle’sUConnecttsystem. The UConnecttsystem allows up toseven cellular phones to be linked to the system. Onlyone linked (or paired) cellular phone can be used with thesystem at a time. The system is available in English,Spanish, or French languages.Phone ButtonThe rearview mirror contains the microphonefor the system (depending on the type ofmirror and radio equipped), and either theradio or the mirror has the two control buttons(PHONE Button and VOICE RECOGNITION button)that will enable you to access the system.Voice Recognition ButtonActual button location may vary with radio.The individual buttons are described in the“Operation” section.The UConnecttsystem can be used with any Hands-FreeProfile certified Bluetoothtcellular phone. See theUConnecttwebsite for supported phones. If your cellu-lar phone supports a different profile (e.g., HeadsetProfile) you may not be able to use any UConnecttfeatures. Refer to your cellular service provider or thephone manufacturer for details.The UConnecttsystem is fully integrated with the vehi-cle’s audio system. The volume of the UConnecttsystemcan be adjusted either from the radio volume controlknob or from the steering wheel radio control (rightswitch), if so equipped.UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 793
The radio display will be used for visual prompts fromthe UConnecttsystem such as 9CELL9or caller ID oncertain radios.OperationVoice commands can be used to operate the UConnecttsystem and to navigate through the UConnecttmenustructure. Voice commands are required after mostUConnecttsystem prompts. You will be prompted for aspecific command and then guided through the availableoptions.•Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait forthe beep, which follows the 9Ready9prompt or anotherprompt.•For certain operations, compound commands can beused. For example, instead of saying 9Setup9and then9Phone Pairing,9the following compound commandcan be said: 9Setup Phone Pairing.9•For each feature explanation in this section, only thecombined form of the voice command is given. Youcan also break the commands into parts and say eachpart of the command when you are asked for it. Forexample, you can use the combined form voice com-mand 9Phonebook New Entry,9or you can break thecombined form command into two voice commands:9Phonebook9and 9New Entry.9Please remember, theUConnecttsystem works best when you talk in anormal conversational tone, as if speaking to someonesitting a few feet/meters away from you.Voice Command TreeRefer to “Voice Tree” in this section.Help CommandIf you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want toknow your options at any prompt, say 9Help9followingthe beep. The UConnecttsystem will play all the optionsat any prompt if you ask for help.80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To activate the UConnecttsystem from idle, simply pressthe PHONE button and follow the audible prompts fordirections. All UConnecttsystem sessions begin with apress of the PHONE button on the radio control head.Cancel CommandAt any prompt, after the beep, you can say 9Cancel9andyou will be returned to the main menu. However, in afew instances the system will take you back to theprevious menu.Pair (Link) UConnecttSystem to a Cellular PhoneTo begin using your UConnecttsystem, you must pairyour compatible Bluetoothtenabled cellular phone.To complete the pairing process, you will need to refer-ence your cellular phone Owner’s Manual. TheUConnecttwebsite may also provide detailed instruc-tions for pairing.The following are general phone to UConnecttsystempairing instructions:•Press the PHONE button to begin.•After the 9Ready9prompt and the following beep, say9Setup Phone Pairing.9•When prompted, after the beep, say 9Pair a Phone9andfollow the audible prompts.•You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identi-fication Number (PIN), which you will later need toenter into your cellular phone. You can enter anyfour-digit PIN.You will not need to remember this PINafter the initial pairing process.•For identification purposes, you will be prompted togive the UConnecttsystem a name for your cellularphone. Each cellular phone that is paired should begiven a unique phone name.UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 813
•You will then be asked to give your cellular phone apriority level between 1 and 7, with 1 being the highestpriority. You can pair up to seven cellular phones toyour UConnecttsystem. However, at any given time,only one cellular phone can be in use, connected toyour UConnecttsystem. The priority allows theUConnecttsystem to know which cellular phone touse if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at thesame time. For example, if priority 3 and priority 5phones are present in the vehicle, the UConnecttsystem will use the priority 3 cellular phone when youmake a call. You can select to use a lower prioritycellular phone at any time (refer to 9Advanced PhoneConnectivity9in this section).Dial by Saying a Number•Press the PHONE button to begin.•After the 9Ready9prompt and the following beep, say9Dial.9•The system will prompt you to say the number youwant to call.•For example, you can say 9234-567-8901.9The phonenumber that you enter must be of valid length andcombination. Based on the country in which the ve-hicle was purchased, the UConnecttsystem limits theuser from dialing an invalid combination of numbers.For example, in the U.S., 234-567-890 is nine digitslong, which is not a valid U.S. phone number - theclosest valid phone number has 10 digits.•The UConnecttsystem will confirm the phone num-ber and then dial. The number will appear in thedisplay of certain radios.Call by Saying a Name•Press the PHONE button to begin.•After the 9Ready9prompt and the following beep, say“Call.982 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•The system will prompt you to say the name of theperson you want to call.•After the 9Ready9prompt and the following beep, saythe name of the person you want to call. For example,you can say 9John Doe,9where John Doe is a previ-ously stored name entry in the UConnecttphonebook.To learn how to store a name in the phonebook, referto 9Add Names to Your UConnecttPhonebook,9inthis section.•The UConnecttsystem will confirm the name andthen dial the corresponding phone number, whichmay appear in the display of certain radios.Add Names to Your UConnecttPhonebookNOTE: Adding names to the phonebook is recom-mended when the vehicle is not in motion.•Press the PHONE button to begin.•After the 9Ready9prompt and the following beep, say9Phonebook New Entry.9•When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use oflong names helps the voice recognition and it isrecommended. For example, say 9Robert Smith9or9Robert9instead of 9Bob.9•When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.,9Home,99Work,99Mobile,9or 9Pager9). This will allowyou to store multiple numbers for each phonebookentry, if desired.•When prompted, recite the phone number for thephonebook entry that you are adding.After you are finished adding an entry into the phone-book, you will be given the opportunity to add morephone numbers to the current entry or to return to themain menu.UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 833
The UConnecttsystem will allow you to enter up to 32names in the phonebook with each name having up tofour associated phone numbers and designations. Eachlanguage has a separate 32-name phonebook accessibleonly in that language.Phonebook DownloadUConnecttallows the user to download entries fromtheir phone via Bluetootht. To use this feature, press thePHONE button and say “Phonebook Download.” Thesystem prompts, “Ready to accept “V” card entry viaBluetootht…” The system is now ready to accept phone-book entries from your phone using the BluetoothtObject Exchange Profile (OBEX). Please see your phoneOwner’s Manual for specific instructions on how to sendthese entries from your phone.NOTE:•The phone handset must support BluetoothtOBEXtransfers of phonebook entries to use this feature.•Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if theyare already connected to any system via Bluetootht,and you may see a message on the phone display thatthe Bluetoothtlink is busy. In this case, the user mustfirst disconnect or drop the Bluetoothtconnection tothe UConnecttsystem, and then send the addressbook entry via Bluetootht. Please see your phoneOwner’s Manual for specific instructions on how todrop the Bluetoothtconnection.•If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters, itwill only use the first 24 characters.Edit Entries in the UConnecttPhonebookNOTE: Editing names in the phonebook is recom-mended when the vehicle is not in motion.•Press the PHONE button to begin.•After the 9Ready9prompt and the following beep, say9Phonebook Edit.984 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•You will then be asked for the name of the phonebookentry that you wish to edit.•Next, choose the number designation (home, work,mobile, or pager) that you wish to edit.•When prompted, recite the new phone number for thephonebook entry that you are editing.After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry inthe phonebook, call the number you just edited, or returnto the main menu.9Phonebook Edit9can be used to add another phonenumber to a name entry that already exists in thephonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have amobile and a home number, but you can add ”JohnDoe’s” work number later using the 9Phonebook Edit9feature.Delete Entries in the UConnecttPhonebookNOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommendedwhen the vehicle is not in motion.•Press the PHONE button to begin.•After the 9Ready9prompt and the following beep, say9Phonebook Delete.9•After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you willthen be asked for the name of the entry that you wishto delete. You can either say the name of a phonebookentry that you wish to delete or you can say 9ListNames9to hear a list of the entries in the phonebookfrom which you choose. To select one of the entriesfrom the list, press the “Voice Recognition” buttonwhile the UConnecttsystem is playing the desiredentry and say 9Delete.9UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 853
•After you enter the name, the UConnecttsystem willask you which designation you wish to delete: home,work, mobile, pager, or all. Say the designation youwish to delete.•Note that only the phonebook entry in the currentlanguage is deleted.Delete All Entries in the UConnecttPhonebook•Press the PHONE button to begin.•After the 9Ready9prompt and the following beep, say9Phonebook Erase All.9•The UConnecttsystem will ask you to verify that youwish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.•After confirmation, the phonebook entries will bedeleted.•Note that only the phonebook in the current languageis deleted.List All Names in the UConnecttPhonebook•Press the PHONE button to begin.•After the 9Ready9prompt and the following beep, say9Phonebook List Names.9•The UConnecttsystem will play the names of all thephonebook entries.•To call one of the names in the list, press the “VoiceRecognition” button during the playing of the desiredname, and say 9Call.9NOTE: The user can also exercise 9Edit9or 9Delete9operations at this point.•The UConnecttsystem will then prompt you as to thenumber designation you wish to call.•The selected number will be dialed.86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Phone Call FeaturesThe following features can be accessed through theUConnecttsystem if the feature(s) are available on yourcellular service plan. For example, if your cellular serviceplan provides three-way calling, this feature can beaccessed through the UConnecttsystem. Check withyour cellular service provider for the features that youhave.Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - No CallCurrently in ProgressWhen you receive a call on your cellular phone, theUConnecttsystem will interrupt the vehicle audio sys-tem, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer thecall. Press the PHONE button to accept the call. To rejectthe call, press and hold the PHONE button until you heara single beep, indicating that the incoming call wasrejected.Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - CallCurrently in ProgressIf a call is currently in progress and you have anotherincoming call, you will hear the same network tones forcall waiting that you normally hear when using your cellphone. Press the PHONE button to place the current callon hold and answer the incoming call.NOTE: The UConnecttsystem compatible phones inthe market today do not support rejecting an incomingcall when another call is in progress. Therefore, the usercan only answer an incoming call or ignore it.Making a Second Call While Current Call in ProgressTo make a second call while you are currently on a call,press the “Voice Recognition” button and say 9Dial9or9Call9followed by the phone number or phonebook entryyou wish to call. The first call will be on hold while thesecond call is in progress. To go back to the first call, referto 9Toggling Between Calls9in this section. To combinetwo calls, refer to 9Conference Call9in this section.UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 873
Place/Retrieve a Call From HoldTo put a call on hold, press the PHONE button until youhear a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold.To bring the call back from hold, press and hold thePHONE button until you hear a single beep.Toggling Between CallsIf two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),press the PHONE button until you hear a single beep,indicating that the active and hold status of the two callshave switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at onetime.Conference CallWhen two calls are in progress (one active and one onhold), press and hold the PHONE button until you heara double beep indicating that the two calls have beenjoined into one conference call.Three-Way CallingTo initiate three-way calling, press the “Voice Recogni-tion” button while a call is in progress, and make asecond phone call, as described under 9Making a SecondCall While Current Call in Progress.9After the second callhas established, press and hold the PHONE button untilyou hear a double beep, indicating that the two calls havebeen joined into one conference call.Call TerminationTo end a call in progress, momentarily press the PHONEbutton. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and ifthere is a call on hold, it will become the new active call.If the active call is terminated by the far end, a call onhold may not become active automatically. This is cellphone-dependent. To bring the call back from hold, pressand hold the PHONE button until you hear a single beep.88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Redial•Press the PHONE button to begin.•After the 9Ready9prompt and the following beep, say9Redial.9•The UConnecttsystem will call the last number thatwas dialed from your cellular phone.NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from theUConnecttsystem.Call ContinuationCall continuation is the progression of a phone call on theUConnecttsystem after the vehicle ignition key has beenswitched to OFF. Call continuation functionality avail-able on the vehicle can be any one of three types:•After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call cancontinue on the UConnecttsystem either until the callends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictatescessation of the call on the UConnecttsystem andtransfer of the call to the mobile phone.•After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call cancontinue on the UConnecttsystem for a certain dura-tion, after which the call is automatically transferredfrom the UConnecttsystem to the mobile phone.•An active call is automatically transferred to themobile phone after the ignition key is switched to OFF.UConnectTSystem FeaturesLanguage SelectionTo change the language that the UConnecttsystem isusing:•Press the PHONE button to begin.UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 893
•After the 9Ready9prompt and the following beep, saythe name of the language you wish to switch toEnglish, Espanol, or Francais.•Continue to follow the system prompts to completelanguage selection.After selecting one of the languages, all prompts andvoice commands will be in that language.NOTE: After every UConnecttlanguage change opera-tion, only the language-specific 32-name phonebook isusable. The paired phone name is not language-specificand usable across all languages.Emergency AssistanceIf you are in an emergency and the mobile phone isreachable:•Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergencynumber for your area.If the phone is not reachable and the UConnecttsystemis operational, you may reach the emergency number asfollows:•Press the PHONE button to begin.•After the 9Ready9prompt and the following beep, say9Emergency9and the UConnecttsystem will instructthe paired cellular phone to call the emergency num-ber. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, andMexico.NOTE: The emergency number dialed is based on thecountry where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S.and Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed maynot be applicable with the available cellular service andarea.The UConnecttsystem does slightly lower your chancesof successfully making a phone call as to that for the cellphone directly.90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Your phone must be turned on and paired to theUConnecttsystem to allow use of this vehicle feature inemergency situations, when the cell phone has networkcoverage and stays paired to the UConnecttsystem.Towing AssistanceIf you need towing assistance:•Press the PHONE button to begin.•After the 9Ready9prompt and the following beep, say9Towing Assistance.9NOTE: The Towing Assistance number dialed is basedon the country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-528-2069 for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14-3454for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside MexicoCity in Mexico).Please refer to the 24-Hour “Towing Assistance” cover-age details in the Warranty Information Booklet and onthe 24–Hour Towing Assistance Card.PagingTo learn how to page, refer to 9Working with AutomatedSystems.9Paging works properly except for pagers ofcertain companies, which time out a little too soon towork properly with the UConnecttsystem.Voice Mail CallingTo learn how to access your voice mail, refer to 9Workingwith Automated Systems.9Working with Automated SystemsThis method is used in instances where one generally hasto press numbers on the cellular phone keypad whilenavigating through an automated telephone system.You can use your UConnecttsystem to access a voicemail system or an automated service, such as a pagingservice or automated customer service line. Some ser-vices require immediate response selection. In someinstances, that may be too quick for use of the UConnecttsystem.UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 913
When calling a number with your UConnecttsystemthat normally requires you to enter in a touch-tonesequence on your cellular phone keypad, you can pressthe “Voice Recognition” button and say the sequence youwish to enter, followed by the word 9Send.9For example,if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound, (3 74 6 #), you can press the “Voice Recognition” button andsay, 93746#Send.9Saying a number, or sequence ofnumbers, followed by 9Send,9is also to be used fornavigating through an automated customer service cen-ter menu structure, and to leave a number on a pager.You can also send stored UConnecttphonebook entriesas tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pagerentries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish tocall and then press the “Voice Recognition” button andsay, “Send.” The system will prompt you to enter thename or number and say the name of the phonebookentry you wish to send. The UConnecttsystem will thensend the corresponding phone number associated withthe phonebook entry, as tones over the phone.NOTE:•You may not hear all of the tones due to cellular phonenetwork configurations; this is normal.•Some paging and voice mail systems have system timeout settings that are too short and may not allow theuse of this feature.Barge In - Overriding PromptsThe “Voice Recognition” button can be used when youwish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voicerecognition command immediately. For example, if aprompt is asking 9Would you like to pair a phone, cleara{,9you could press the “Voice Recognition” button andsay, 9Pair a Phone9to select that option without having tolisten to the rest of the voice prompt.92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Turning Confirmation Prompts On/OffTurning confirmation prompts off will stop the systemfrom confirming your choices (e.g., the UConnecttsys-tem will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).•Press the PHONE button to begin.•After the 9Ready9prompt and the following beep, say9Setup Confirmations.9The UConnecttsystem willplay the current confirmation prompt status and youwill be given the choice to change it.Phone and Network Status IndicatorsIf available on the radio and/or on a premium displaysuch as the instrument panel cluster, and supported byyour cell phone, the UConnecttsystem will providenotification to inform you of your phone and networkstatus when you are attempting to make a phone callusing UConnectt. The status is given for roaming, net-work signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.Dialing Using the Cellular Phone KeypadYou can dial a phone number with your cellular phonekeypad and still use the UConnecttsystem (while dial-ing via the cell phone keypad, the user must exercisecaution and take precautionary safety measures). Bydialing a number with your paired Bluetoothtcellularphone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’saudio system. The UConnecttsystem will work the sameas if you dial the number using voice recognition.NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send thedial ring to the UConnecttsystem to play it on thevehicle audio system, so you will not hear it. Under thissituation, after successfully dialing a number the usermay feel that the call did not go through even though thecall is in progress. Once your call is answered, you willhear the audio.UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 933
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute Off)When you mute the UConnecttsystem, you will still beable to hear the conversation coming from the otherparty, but the other party will not be able to hear you. Inorder to mute the UConnecttsystem:•Press the “Voice Recognition” button.•Following the beep, say 9Mute.9In order to un-mute the UConnecttsystem:•Press the “Voice Recognition” button.•Following the beep, say 9Mute off.9Advanced Phone ConnectivityTransfer Call to and from Cellular PhoneThe UConnecttsystem allows ongoing calls to be trans-ferred from your cellular phone to the UConnecttsystemwithout terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing callfrom your UConnecttpaired cellular phone to theUConnecttsystem or vice versa, press the “Voice Recog-nition” button and say 9Transfer Call.9Connect or Disconnect Link Between theUConnecttSystem and Cellular PhoneYour cellular phone can be paired with many differentelectronic devices, but can only be actively 9connected9with one electronic device at a time.If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetoothtconnection between a UConnecttpaired cellular phoneand the UConnecttsystem, follow the instructions de-scribed in your cellular phone User’s Manual.List Paired Cellular Phone Names•Press the PHONE button to begin.•After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say“Setup Phone Pairing.”94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•When prompted, say 9List Phones.9•The UConnecttsystem will play the phone names ofall paired cellular phones in order from the highest tothe lowest priority. To “select” or “delete” a pairedphone being announced, press the “Voice Recogni-tion” button and say “Select” or “Delete.”Also, see thenext two sections for an alternate way to “select” or“delete” a paired phone.Select Another Cellular PhoneThis feature allows you to select and start using anotherphone paired with the UConnecttsystem.•Press the PHONE button to begin.•After the 9Ready9prompt and the following beep, say9Setup Select Phone9and follow the prompts.•You can also press the “Voice Recognition” button atany time while the list is being played, and thenchoose the phone that you wish to select.•The selected phone will be used for the next phonecall. If the selected phone is not available, theUConnecttsystem will return to using the highestpriority phone present in or near (approximatelywithin 30 ft [9 m]) the vehicle.Delete UConnecttPaired Cellular Phones•Press the PHONE button to begin.•After the 9Ready9prompt and the following beep, say9Setup Phone Pairing.9•At the next prompt, say 9Delete9and follow theprompts.•You can also press the “Voice Recognition” button atany time while the list is being played, and thenchoose the phone you wish to delete.UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 953
Things You Should Know About Your UConnectTSystemUConnecttTutorialTo hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press thePHONE button and say “UConnecttTutorial.”Voice TrainingFor users experiencing difficulty with the system recog-nizing their voice commands or numbers, the UConnecttsystem Voice Training feature may be used. To enter thistraining mode, follow one of the two following proce-dures:From outside the UConnecttmode (e.g., from radiomode):•Press and hold the “Voice Recognition” button for fiveseconds until the session begins, or,•Press the “Voice Recognition” button and say the9Setup, Voice Training9command.Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by theUConnecttsystem. For best results, the Voice Trainingsession should be completed when the vehicle is parkedwith the engine running, all windows closed, and theblower fan switched OFF.This procedure may be repeated with a new user. Thesystem will adapt to the last trained voice only.To restore the Voice Recognition system to factory defaultsettings, enter the Voice Training session via the aboveprocedure and follow the prompts.Voice Recognition (VR)•For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror toprovide at least1⁄2in (1 cm) gap between the overheadconsole (if equipped) and the mirror.•Always wait for the beep before speaking.96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•Speak normally, without pausing, just as you wouldspeak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away fromyou.•Make sure that no one other than you is speakingduring a voice recognition period.•Performance is maximized under:•low-to-medium blower setting,•low-to-medium vehicle speed,•low road noise,•smooth road surface,•fully closed windows,•dry weather condition.•Even though the system is designed for users speakingin North American English, French, and Spanish ac-cents, the system may not always work for some.•When navigating through an automated system suchas voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end ofspeaking the digit string, make sure to say 9Send.9•Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle isnot in motion is recommended.•It is not recommended to store similar soundingnames in the UConnecttphonebook.•The UConnecttphonebook nametag recognition rateis optimized for the person who stored the name in thephonebook.•You can say 9O9(letter 9O9) for 909(zero). 98009must bespoken 9eight-zero-zero.9•Even though international dialing for most numbercombinations is supported, some shortcut dialingnumber combinations may not be supported.•In a convertible vehicle, system performance may becompromised with the convertible top down.UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 973
Far End Audio Performance•Audio quality is maximized under:•low-to-medium blower setting,•low-to-medium vehicle speed,•low road noise,•smooth road surface,•fully closed windows,•dry weather conditions, and•operation from the driver’s seat.•Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudnessto a large degree rely on the phone and network, andnot the UConnecttsystem.•Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced bylowering the in-vehicle audio volume.•In a convertible vehicle, system performance may becompromised with the convertible top down.BluetoothtCommunication LinkCellular phones have been found to lose connection tothe UConnecttsystem. When this happens, the connec-tion can generally be re-established by switching thephone off/on.Your cell phone is recommended to remainin BluetoothtON mode.Power-UpAfter switching the ignition key from OFF to either ONor ACC position, or after a language change, you mustwait at least five seconds prior to using the system.98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 993
100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 1013
Voice CommandsPrimary Alternate(s)zeroonetwothreefourfivesixseveneightninestar (*)plus (+)pound (#)add locationallVoice CommandsPrimary Alternate(s)callcancelconfirmation promptscontinuedeletedialdownloadeditemergencyEnglisherase allEspanolFrancaishelphome102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice CommandsPrimary Alternate(s)languagelist nameslist phonesmobilemutemute offnew entrynopagerpair a phonephone pairing pairingphonebook phone bookpreviousrecord againredialVoice CommandsPrimary Alternate(s)return to main menu return or main menuselect phone selectsendset up phone settings or phoneset uptowing assistancetransfer callUConnecttTutorialtry againvoice trainingworkyesUNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 1033
General InformationThis device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules andRSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to thefollowing conditions:•This device may not cause harmful interference.•This device must accept any interference received,including interference that may cause undesired op-eration.VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPEDVoice Recognition System (VR) OperationThis Voice Recognition System allows you tocontrol yourAM, FM radio, satellite radio, discplayer, and a memo recorder.NOTE: In a stressful situation, take care to speak intothe Voice Interface System as calmly and normally aspossible. The ability of the Voice Interface System torecognize user voice commands may be negatively af-fected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level.WARNING!Any voice commanded system should be used onlyin safe driving conditions and all attention should bekept on the roadway ahead. Failure to do so mayresult in an accident causing serious injury or death.When you press the VR hard-key, you will hear a beep.The beep is your signal to give a command.NOTE: If you do not say a command within a fewseconds, the system will present you with a list ofoptions.If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it listsoptions, press the VR hard-key, listen for the beep, andsay your command.104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Pressing the VR hard-key while the system is speaking isknown as “barging in.” The system will be interruptedand you can add or change commands. This will becomehelpful once you start to learn the options.NOTE: At any time, you can say the words CANCEL,HELP, or MAIN MENU.These commands are universal and can be used from anymenu. All other commands can be used depending uponthe active application.For example, if you are in the disc menu and you arelistening to FM radio, you can speak commands from thedisc menu or from the FM radio menu.When using this system, you should speak clearly and ata normal speaking volume.The system will best recognize your speech if the win-dows are closed, and the heater/air-conditioning fan isset to low.At any point, if the system does not recognize one of yourcommands, you will be prompted to repeat it.To hear the first available Menu, press the VR hard-keyand say HELP or MAIN MENU.CommandsThe Voice Recognition System understands two types ofcommands. Global commands are available at all times.Local commands are available if the supported radiomode is active.Changing the Volume1. Start a dialogue by pressing the VR hard-key.2. Say a command (e.g., HELP).3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust thevolume to a comfortable level while the voice recognitionsystem is speaking. Please note the volume setting for VRis different then the audio system.UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 1053
Main MenuStart a dialogue by pressing the VR hard-key. You maysay MAIN MENU to switch to the main menu.In this mode, you can say the following commands:•RADIO (to switch to the radio mode)•DISC (to switch to the disc mode)•MEMO (to switch to the memo recorder)Radio AM (or Radio Long Wave or Radio MediumWave - if equipped)To switch to the AM band say AM or RADIOAM. In thismode, you may say the following commands:•FREQUENCY (to change the frequency)•NEXT STATION (to select the next station)•PREVIOUS STATION (to select the previous station)•RADIO MENU (to switch to the radio menu)•MAIN MENU (to switch to the main menu)Radio FMTo switch to the FM band say FM or RADIO FM. In thismode, you may say the following commands:•FREQUENCY (to change the frequency)•NEXT STATION (to select the next station)•PREVIOUS STATION (to select the previous station)•RADIO MENU (to switch to the radio menu)•MAIN MENU (to switch to the main menu)Satellite RadioTo switch to satellite radio mode say SAT or SATELLITERADIO. In this mode, you may say the following com-mands:•CHANNEL NUMBER (to change the channel by itsspoken number)106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•NEXT CHANNEL (to select the next channel)•PREVIOUS CHANNEL (to select the previous chan-nel)•LIST CHANNEL (to hear a list of available channels)•SELECT NAME (to say the name of a channel)•RADIO MENU (to switch to the radio menu)•MAIN MENU (to switch to the main menu)DiscTo switch to the disc mode say DISC. In this mode, youmay say the following commands:•TRACK (#) (to change the track)•NEXT TRACK (to play the next track)•PREVIOUS TRACK (to play the previous track)•MAIN MENU (to switch to the main menu)MemoTo switch to the voice recorder mode say MEMO. In thismode, you may say the following commands:•NEW MEMO (to record a new memo) — During therecording you may press the VR hard-key to stoprecording. You continue by saying one of the followingcommands:−SAVE (to save the memo)−CONTINUE (to continue recording)−DELETE (to delete the recording)•PLAY MEMOS (to play previously recorded memos)— During the playback you may press the VR hard-key to stop playing memos. You continue by sayingone of the following commands:−REPEAT (to repeat a memo)−NEXT (to play the next memo)UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 1073
−PREVIOUS (to play the previous memo)−DELETE (to delete a memo)•DELETE ALL (to delete all memos)NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to press the VRhard-key first and wait for the beep, before speaking the“barge in” commands.Voice TrainingFor users experiencing difficulty with the system recog-nizing their voice commands or numbers, the UConnecttsystem Voice Training feature may be used.1. Press the VR hard-key, speak “System Setup” and onceyou are in that menu then speak “Voice Training.” Thiswill train your own voice to the system and will improverecognition.2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by theUConnecttSystem. For best results, the Voice Trainingsession should be completed when the vehicle is parked,engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fanswitched OFF. This procedure may be repeated with anew user. The system will adapt to the last trained voiceonly.108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
SEATSEasy Entry SeatsPushing the lever upward (toward the front of thevehicle) allows the seat back to dump forward and theseat to slide forward. This allows for easier access to therear seat.Power SeatsThe power seat switch is on the outboard side of the seatnear the floor. Use this switch to move the driver’s seatup or down, forward or rearward, or to tilt the seat.Easy Entry SeatsPower Seat SwitchUNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 1093
WARNING!Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving isdangerous. The sudden movement of the seat couldcause you to lose control. The seat belt might not beproperly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjustthe seat only while the vehicle is parked.CAUTION!Do not place any article under a power seat as it maycause damage to the seat controls.Front Seat Back ReclineTo recline:1. Lean forward in the seat and lift the handle, then leanback to the desired position and release the handle.2. Lift the handle to return the seatback to an uprightposition.Recline Lever110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Lumbar SupportThis feature allows you to increase or decrease theamount of lumbar support. Turn the control lever for-ward to increase and rearward to decrease the desiredamount of lumbar support.Head RestraintsHead restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in theevent of impact from the rear.Adjust the restraint so that theupper edge is as high as practical. To raise it, pull upwardon the head restraint. To lower it, depress the button on thepost guide and push downward on the head restraint.Lumbar Support Adjustable Head RestraintUNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 1113
Heated SeatsHeated seats provide comfort and warmth on cold daysand can help soothe sore muscles and backs. The heatersprovide the same heat level for both cushion and back.The driver seat and front passenger seat are heated.The controls for each heater are located near the bottomcenter of the instrument panel. After turning on theignition, you can choose from High, Low, or Off heatsettings. Amber indicators in the top portion of eachswitch indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicatorswill illuminate for high, one for low, and none for off.Press the switch once to select high level heating. Pressthe switch a second time to select low level heating. Pressthe switch a third time to shut OFF the heating elements.If high level heating is selected, the system will automati-cally switch to the low level after 30 minutes of continu-ous operation. At that time, the number of indicatorsHeated Seat Switch112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
illuminated changes from two to one, indicating thechange. Operation on the low setting also turns offautomatically after 30 minutes.NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be feltwithin two to five minutes.WARNING!Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin becauseof advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cordinjury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or otherphysical conditions must exercise care when using theseat heater. It may cause burns even at low tempera-tures, especially if used for long periods.Do not place anything on the seat that insulatesagainst heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This maycause the seat heater to overheat.Folding Rear Seat — If EquippedThe rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide anadditional storage area. Pull on the loops shown in theillustration to fold down either or both seatbacks. Theseloops can be tucked away when not in use.Rear Folding SeatUNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 1133
When the seatback is folded to the upright position, makesure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of theseatback above the seat strap.WARNING!•Be certain that the seatback is securely locked intoposition. If the seatback is not securely locked intoposition, the seat will not provide the properstability for child seats and/or passengers. Animproperly latched seat could cause serious injury.•The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with therear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded downposition) should not be used as a play area bychildren when the vehicle is in motion. They couldbe seriously injured in an accident. Childrenshould be seated and using the proper restraintsystem.TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOODTwo latches must be released to open the hood. First, pullthe hood release lever located under the left side of theinstrument panel.Hood Release Lever114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Next, move to the outside of the vehicle and push thesafety catch to the left. The safety catch is located underthe center front edge of the hood.To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood toclose it. Lower the hood until it is open approximately 6in (15 cm), and then drop it. This should secure bothlatches. Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fullyclosed, with both latches engaged.WARNING!If the hood is not fully latched, it could fly up whenthe vehicle is moving and block your forward vision.You could have a collision. Be sure the hood latch isfully latched before driving.Hood Safety CatchUNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 1153
LIGHTSHeadlight SwitchThe headlight switch is located on the left side of theinstrument panel. This switch controls the operation ofthe headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights,instrument panel light dimming, interior lights, and foglights.Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detentfor parking light and instrument panel light operation.Turn it to the second detent for headlight, park light, andinstrument panel light operation.Headlight Switch116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Headlights — If EquippedThis system automatically turns the headlights on or offaccording to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to theAUTO (A) position. When the system is on, the headlighttime delay feature is also on. This means the headlightswill stay on for up to 90 seconds after you turn theignition switch off. To turn the automatic system off,move the headlight switch out of the AUTO (A) position.NOTE: The engine must be running before the head-lights will come on in the automatic mode.Headlights On with Wipers (Available with AutoHeadlights Only)When this feature is active, the headlights will turn onapproximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned onif the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO (A)position. In addition, the headlights will turn off whenthe wipers are turned off if they were turned on by thisfeature.The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be enabled ordisabled. Refer to ”Headlights On with Wipers,” under“Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features),”under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center” in Section4.Headlight Time DelayThis feature provides the safety of headlight illuminationfor up to 90 seconds (programmable) when leaving yourvehicle in an unlit area.To activate the delay feature, turn off the ignition switchwhile the headlights are still on. Then, turn off theheadlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval beginswhen the headlight switch is turned OFF.UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 1173
If you turn the headlights, park lights, or ignition switchON again, the system will cancel the delay.If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they willturn off in the normal manner.NOTE: The lights must be turned off within 45 secondsof turning the ignition OFF to activate this feature.The Headlight delay time is programmable. Refer to“Delay Turning Headlights Off,” under “Personal Set-tings (Customer Programmable Features),” under “Elec-tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4.Daytime Running Lights — If EquippedThe high beam headlights will come on as DaytimeRunning Lights whenever the ignition switch is ON, theheadlights are off, and the parking brake is off. Theheadlight switch must be used for normal nighttimedriving.Lights-On ReminderIf the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignitionis turned OFF, a chime will sound to alert the driverwhen the driver’s door is opened.Fog LightsThe front fog light switch is built into the head-light switch. To activate the front fog lights, turnon the parking lights or the low beam headlightsand press the headlight switch. To turn off the front foglights, either press the headlight switch again or turn offthe headlight switch.An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminateswhen the fog lights are turned on.NOTE: The fog lights will operate with the low beamheadlights or parking lights on. However, selecting thehigh beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Multifunction Control LeverThe multifunction control lever controls the operation ofthe turn signals, headlight beam selection, and passinglights. The lever is located on the left side of the steeringcolumn.Turn SignalsMove the multifunction control lever up or down and thecorresponding turn signal indicator in the instrumentcluster flashes to show proper operation of the front andrear turn signal lights. You can also signal a lane changeby moving the lever partially up or down withoutmoving beyond the detent. Releasing the lever at thedetent will provide three flashes.If either indicator has a very fast flash rate, check for adefective outside light bulb. If an indicator fails to lightwhen the lever is moved, see your authorized dealer forservice.NOTE: A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in theElectronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) and a con-tinuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven morethan 1 mi (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.Multifunction Control LeverUNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 1193
Highbeam/Lowbeam Select SwitchPush the multifunction control lever away from you toswitch the headlights to HIGH beam. Pull the levertoward you to switch the headlights back to LOW beam.Flash to PassYou can signal another vehicle with your headlights bylightly pulling the multifunction control lever towardyou. This will cause the headlights to turn on at highbeam and remain on until the lever is released.Overhead Console Map/Reading LightsThese lights are mounted between the sun visors on theoverhead console. Each light is turned on by pressing thelens. Press the lens a second time to turn off the light.These lights also turn on when a door is opened, or whenthe UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter is pressed, or when the dimmer control isturned fully upward, past the second detent.Overhead Console120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Interior LightsThe interior lights come on when a door is opened.To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn offautomatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is movedto the LOCK position. This will occur if the interior lightswere switched on manually or are on because a door isopen. This includes the glove box light, but not the trunklight. To restore interior light operation, either turn theignition switch ON or cycle the light switch.Dimmer ControlThe dimmer control is part of the head-light switch and is located on the leftside of the instrument panel. With theparking lights or headlights on, rotatingthe dimmer control upward will in-crease the brightness of the instrumentpanel lights and, if so equipped, thelighting in the door map pockets and cupholders.Dome Light PositionRotate the dimmer control completely upward to thesecond detent to turn on the interior lights. The interiorlights will remain on when the dimmer control is in thisposition.Interior Light Defeat (OFF)Rotate the dimmer control to the extreme bottom offposition. The interior lights will remain off when thedoors are open.Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)Rotate the dimmer control upward to the first detent.This feature brightens all text displays such as theodometer, Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC),and radio when the parking lights or headlights are on.UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 1213
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERSThe multifunction control lever operates thewindshield wipers and washer when the ignitionswitch is in the ON position. The lever is locatedon the left side of the steering column.Rotate the end of the multifunction control lever to thefirst detent past the intermittent settings for low speedwiper operation, or to the second detent past the inter-mittent settings for high speed wiper operation.CAUTION!Turn the windshield wipers off when drivingthrough an automatic car wash. Damage to the wind-shield wipers may result if the wiper switch is left inany position other than off.Intermittent Wiper SystemUse the intermittent wiper when weather conditionsmake a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be-tween cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the multifunc-tion control lever to the first detent position, and thenturn the end of the lever to select the desired delayinterval. There are six delay settings, which allow you toWindshield Wiper/Washer Control122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
regulate the wipe interval from a minimum of one cycleevery second to a maximum of approximately 23 secondsbetween cycles.WARNING!Sudden loss of visibility through the windshieldcould lead to an accident. You might not see othervehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing ofthe windshield during freezing weather, warm thewindshield with the defroster before and duringwindshield washer use.Mist FeaturePush the multifunction control lever inward (toward thesteering column) to the first detent to activate a singlewipe cycle to clear off road mist or spray from a passingvehicle. The wipers will continue to operate until yourelease the lever.Windshield WashersTo use the washer, push the multifunction control leverinward (toward the steering column) to the second detentand hold it for as long as washer spray is desired.If you activate the washer while the windshield wipercontrol is in the delay range, the wipers will operate fortwo wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resumethe intermittent interval previously selected.If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper isturned off, the wipers will operate for three wipe cyclesand then turn off.UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 1233
Headlights On with Wipers (Available with AutoHeadlights Only)When this feature is active, the headlights will turn onapproximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned onif the headlight switch is placed in theAUTO (A) position.In addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipersare turned off if they were turned on by this feature.The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be enabled ordisabled. Refer to ”Headlights On with Wipers,” under“Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features),”under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center” in Section 4.Adding Washer FluidThe windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in thefront of the engine compartment. Be sure to check thefluid level in the reservoir at regular intervals. Fill thereservoir with windshield washer solvent (not radiatorantifreeze) and operate the system for a few seconds toflush out the residual water.The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gal (4 l) of washerfluid when the message “Low Washer Fluid” appears inthe Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC).Washer Fluid Reservoir124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!Commercially available windshield washer solventsare flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Caremust be exercised when filling or working aroundthe washer solution.TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMNThis feature allows you to tilt the steering columnupward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen orshorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping controlhandle is located below the steering wheel at the end ofthe steering column. To unlock the steering column, pull the control handleoutward. To tilt the steering column, move the steeringwheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen orshorten the steering column, pull the steering wheelTilt Steering ColumnUNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 1253
outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steeringcolumn in position, push the control handle inward untilfully engaged.WARNING!Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. Thetelescoping adjustment must be locked while driv-ing. Adjusting the steering wheel while driving ordriving without the telescoping adjustment lockedcould cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROLWhen engaged, this device takes over the acceleratoroperation at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h).Electronic Speed Control OperationThe speed control lever located on the right side of thesteering wheel operates the system.1 — CANCEL2 — RESUME ACCEL3 — ON/OFF4 — SET DECEL126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To ActivatePush and release the ON/OFF button locatedon the end of the speed control lever. Theindicator light in the instrument cluster willilluminate to show that the speed control sys-tem is on. To turn the system off, push and release theON/OFF button again. The system and the indicatorlight will turn off.WARNING!Leaving the electronic speed control system on whennot in use is dangerous. You could accidentally setthe system or cause it to go faster than you want. Youcould lose control and have an accident. Alwaysleave the system OFF when you aren’t using it.To Set At A Desired SpeedWhen the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push thelever downward to SET DECEL and release. Removeyour foot from the accelerator pedal and the vehicle willoperate at the selected speed.NOTE:•Speed control will only function in 3rd, 4th, or 5th gearwhen in the Autosticktmode (if equipped).•The speed control may not engage if a different sizetire is installed on one wheel, such as the compactspare tire.To DeactivateThe system will disable electronic speed control withouterasing the memory if you:•Softly tap the brake pedal,•Depress the brake pedal, or•Pull the speed control lever toward you to CANCEL.UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 1273
Pushing and releasing the ON/OFF button or turning offthe ignition erases the set speed from memory.To Resume SpeedIf you deactivated the speed control without erasing theset speed from memory and your vehicle speed is above20 mph (32 km/h), you can resume the previous setspeed. To do so, push the lever upward to RESUMEACCEL and release. Then remove your foot from theaccelerator pedal.To Vary the Speed SettingWhen the speed control is set, you can increase speed bypushing up and holding the lever in RESUME ACCEL.When the lever is released, a new set speed will beestablished.Tapping the lever to RESUME ACCEL once will result ina 1 mph (1.6 km/h) speed increase. Each time the lever istapped speed increases, so tapping the lever three timeswill increase speed by 3 mph (4.8 km/h), etc.To decrease speed while speed control is set, push downand hold the lever in SET DECEL. Release the lever whenthe desired speed is reached, and a new set speed will beestablished.Tapping the lever to SET DECEL once will result in a 1mph (1.6 km/h) speed decrease. Each time the lever istapped, speed decreases.To Accelerate For PassingDepress the accelerator as you would normally. When thepedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.Using Speed Control on HillsNOTE: The speed control system maintains speed upand down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hillsis normal.The automatic transmission will downshift while climb-ing uphill or descending downhill. This downshift isnecessary to maintain vehicle set speed.128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur, soit may be preferable to drive without speed control.WARNING!Speed control can be dangerous where the systemcan’t maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle couldgo too fast for the conditions and you could losecontrol. An accident could be the result. Don’t usespeed control in heavy traffic or on roads that arewinding, icy, snow-covered, or slippery.OVERHEAD CONSOLEThe overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights,an optional universal garage door opener (HomeLinkt),storage for sunglasses, and an optional power sunroofswitch.Courtesy/Reading LightsAt the forward end of the console are two courtesy/reading lights.Press the lens to turn on the light. Press it a second timeto turn off the light.Overhead ConsoleUNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 1293
These lights also turn on when a door is opened, or whenthe UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter is pressed, or when the dimmer control isturned fully upward, past the second detent.Sunglasses StorageAt the rear of the console, a compartment is provided forthe storage of a pair of sunglasses.The storage compartment access is a 9push/push9design.Push on the raised bar on the compartment door to open.Push on the raised bar to close.GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPEDHomeLinktreplaces up to three remote controls (hand-held transmitters) that operate devices such as garagedoor openers, motorized gates, lighting, or home securitysystems. The HomeLinktunit operates off your vehicle’sbattery.The HomeLinktbuttons are located in the overheadconsole, and contain one, two, or three dots/lines desig-nating the different HomeLinktchannels.NOTE: HomeLinktis disabled when the Vehicle Secu-rity Alarm is active.HomeLinktButtons130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!Your motorized door or gate will open and close whileyou are training the Universal Transceiver. Do not trainthe transceiver if people or pets are in the path of thedoor or gate. Only use this transceiver with a garagedoor opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature asrequired by federal safety standards. This includesmost garage door opener models manufactured after1982. Do not use a garage door opener without thesesafety features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on theInternet at www.HomeLink.com for safety informationor assistance.WARNING!Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a danger-ous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage whiletraining the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause seri-ous injury or death.Programming HomeLinkTBefore You BeginIf you have not trained any of the HomeLinktbuttons,erase all channels before you begin training.To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for 20seconds. The EVIC will display “CLEARING CHAN-NELS.” Release the buttons when the EVIC messagestates “CHANNELS CLEARED.”It is recommended that a new battery be placed in thehand-held transmitter of the device being programmedto HomeLinktfor more efficient training and accuratetransmission of the radio-frequency signal.Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garagewhile training.1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 1313
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)from the HomeLinktbuttons while keeping the EVICdisplay in view.For optimal training, point the battery end of the hand-held transmitter away from the HomeLinkt.3. Simultaneously, press and hold both the chosenHomeLinktbutton and the hand-held transmitter buttonuntil the EVIC display changes from “CHANNEL #TRAINING” to “CHANNEL # TRAINED.”Then release both the HomeLinktand hand-held trans-mitter buttons.If the EVIC display states “DID NOT TRAIN” repeat Step3. If the signal is too weak, replace the battery in theoriginal hand-held transmitter.It may take up to 30 seconds, or longer, in rare cases. Thegarage door may open and close while you train.NOTE: Some gate operators and garage door openersmay require you to replace Step 3 with procedures notedin the “Gate Operator/Canadian Programming” section.4. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLinktbutton. Ifthe channel has been trained, the EVIC display will nowstate “CHANNEL # TRANSMIT.”If the EVIC display still states “CHANNEL # TRAIN-ING” repeat Step 3.NOTE: After training a HomeLinktchannel, if thegarage door does not operate with HomeLinktand thegarage door opener was manufactured after 1995, thegarage door opener may have rolling code. If so, proceedto the heading “Programming A Rolling Code System.”5. PROGRAMMING A ROLLING CODE SYSTEMAt the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locatethe “learn” or “training” button.132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
This can usually be found where the hanging antennawire is attached to the garage door opener motor (it isNOT the button normally used to open and close thedoor).6. Firmly press and release the “learn” or “training”button. The name and color of the button may vary bymanufacturer.NOTE: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate the nextstep after the “Learn” button has been pressed.7. Return to the vehicle and press the programmedHomeLinktbutton twice (holding the button for twoseconds each time). If the device is plugged in andactivates, programming is complete.If the device does not activate, press the button a thirdtime (for two seconds) to complete the training.If you have any problems, or require assistance, pleasecall toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet atwww.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.To program the remaining two HomeLinktbuttons,repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOTerase the channels.1 — Garage Door Opener2 — Training ButtonUNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 1333
Gate Operator/Canadian ProgrammingCanadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter sig-nals to “time-out” (or quit) after several seconds oftransmission – which may not be long enough forHomeLinktto pick up the signal during programming.Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators aredesigned to “time-out” in the same manner.It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cyclingprocess to prevent possible overheating of the garagedoor or gate motor.If you are having difficulties programming a garage dooropener or a gate operator, replace “ProgrammingHomeLink” Step 3 with the following:3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLinktbuttonwhile you press and release - every two seconds(“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter until HomeLinkthas successfully accepted the frequency signal. TheEVIC display will change from “CHANNEL # TRAIN-ING” to “CHANNEL # TRAINED.”If you unplugged the device for training, plug it back inat this time.Then proceed with Step 4 under “ProgrammingHomeLinkt” earlier in this section.Using HomeLinkTTo operate, simply press and release the programmedHomeLinktbutton. Activation will now occur for thetrained device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator,security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting,etc.) The hand-held transmitter of the device may also beused at any time.134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Reprogramming A Single HomeLinkTButtonTo reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,follow these steps:1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.2. Press and hold the desired HomeLinktbutton for 20seconds until the EVIC display states “CHANNEL #TRAINING.” Do not release the button.3. Without releasing the button, proceed with Program-ming HomeLinktStep 2 and follow all remaining steps.SecurityIt is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turnin your vehicle.To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for 20seconds until the EVIC message states “CHANNELSCLEARED.” Note that all channels will be erased. Indi-vidual channels cannot be erased.The HomeLinktUniversal Transceiver is disabled whenthe Vehicle Security Alarm is active.Troubleshooting TipsIf you are having trouble programming HomeLinkt, hereare some of the most common solutions:•Replace the battery in the original transmitter.•Press the learn button on the garage door opener tocomplete the training for rolling code.•Did you unplug the device for training, and rememberto plug it back in?If you are having any problems or require assistance,please call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet atwww.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 1353
General InformationThis device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and IndustryCanada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:1. This device may not cause harmful interference2. This device must accept any interference that may bereceived including interference that may cause undesiredoperationNOTE: The transmitter has been tested and it complieswith FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications notexpressly approved by the party responsible for compli-ance could void the user’s authority to operate thedevice.The term “IC:” before the certification/registration num-ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifi-cations were met.POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPEDThe power sunroof switch is located between the sunvisors on the overhead console.Power Sunroof Switch136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!•Never leave children in a vehicle with the key inthe ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unat-tended children, can become entrapped by thepower sunroof while operating the power sunroofswitch. Such entrapment may result in seriousinjury or death.•In an accident, there is a greater risk of beingthrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. Youcould also be seriously injured or killed. Alwaysfasten your seat belt properly and make sure allpassengers are also properly secured.•Do not allow small children to operate the sun-roof. Never allow fingers or other body parts, orany object, to project through the sunroof opening.Injury may result.Opening Sunroof - ManuallyPress and hold the switch in the rearward position.Release the switch when the sunroof is in the positiondesired and it will stop moving. If you continue to holdthe switch in the rearward position, the sunroof will openfully and then stop automatically. Release the switch oncethe sunroof stops moving.Opening Sunroof - ExpressPress the switch rearward and release, and the sunroofwill open automatically from any position. The sunroofwill open fully and then stop automatically. This is calledExpress Open. During Express Open operation, anymovement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.Closing Sunroof - ManuallyPress and hold the switch in the forward position.Release the switch when the sunroof is in the positiondesired and it will stop moving. If you continue to holdUNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 1373
the switch in the forward position, the sunroof will closefully and then stop automatically. Release the switch oncethe sunroof stops moving.Closing Sunroof - ExpressPress the switch forward and release, and the sunroofwill close automatically from any position. The sunroofwill close fully and stop automatically. This is calledExpress Close. During Express Close operation, anymovement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.Pinch Protect FeatureThis feature will detect an obstruction in the opening ofthe sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob-struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, thesunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruc-tion if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward andrelease to Express Close.Pinch Protect OverrideIf a known obstruction (ice, debris, etc.) prevents closing,press the switch forward and hold for two seconds afterthe reversal occurs. This allows the sunroof to movetowards the closed position.NOTE: Pinch protection is disabled while the switch ispressed.Venting Sunroof - ExpressPress and release the 9V9button in the center of theswitch, and the sunroof will open to the vent position.This is called Express Vent, which operates regardless ofsunroof position. During Express Vent operation, anymovement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Sunshade OperationThe sunshade can be opened manually. However, thesunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof isopen.Wind BuffetingWind buffeting can be described as the perception ofpressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in theears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with thewindows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certainopen or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs withthe sunroof open, then adjust the sunroof opening tominimize the buffeting or open any window.Sunroof MaintenanceUse only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to cleanthe glass panel.Ignition Off OperationThe power sunroof switch will remain active for up to 60minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF. Openingeither door will cancel this feature. The time for thisfeature is programmable. Refer to “Delay Power Off toAccessories Until Exit,” under “Personal Settings (Cus-tomer Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Ve-hicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4.Sunroof Fully ClosedPress the switch forward and release to ensure that thesunroof is fully closed.UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 1393
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETSThere are two 12-volt electrical outlets on this vehicle.Both of the outlets are protected by a fuse.The front 12-volt power outlet has power available onlywhen the ignition is ON. This outlet will also operate aconventional cigar lighter unit.NOTE: If desired, the front power outlet can be con-verted by your authorized dealer to provide power withthe ignition switch in the LOCK position.Front Power Outlet140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The center console outlet is powered directly from thebattery (power available at all times). Items plugged intothis outlet may discharge the battery and/or preventengine starting.Electrical Outlet Use With Engine OffCAUTION!•Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power fromthe vehicle’s battery even when not in use (i.e., cellularphones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough, thevehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degradebattery life and/or prevent engine starting.•Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers, vacuumcleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery even morequickly. Only use these intermittently and with greatercaution.•After the use of high power draw accessories or longperiods of the vehicle not being started (with accessoriesstill plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a sufficientlength of time to allow the alternator to recharge thevehicle’s battery.•Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do nothang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from theplug. Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage.Center Console Power OutletUNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 1413
CUPHOLDERSFront CupholdersThe front cupholders are located in the center console.Rear CupholdersThe rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrestbetween the rear seats. The cupholders are positionedforward in the armrest and side-by-side to provide conve-nient access to beverage cans or bottles while maintaininga resting place for the rear occupants’ elbows.Front CupholdersRear Cupholders142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONSOLE FEATURESSliding Center Console ArmrestThe center console armrest slides forward with threedetents to provide flexibility for comfort, cupholder use,and shifting ease.Console StorageThe center console has a storage compartment locatedunderneath the armrest, and also contains a 12-voltpower outlet and a molded-in coin holder (designed tohold various size coins).Sliding Console Armrest Center ConsoleUNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 1433
REAR WINDOW FEATURESRear Window DefrosterThe pushbutton for the rear window defroster islocated on the mode knob of the climate controlswitch bank. Press this button to turn on the rear windowdefroster and the electric remote control heated mirrors(if equipped). An amber light shows that the defroster ison.The defroster will automatically turn off after about tenminutes. For an additional five minutes of operation,press the switch again. To prevent excessive batterydrain, use the defroster only when the engine is operat-ing.CAUTION!•Use care when washing the inside of the rearwindow. Do not use abrasive window cleaners onthe interior surface of the window. Use a soft clothand a mild washing solution, wiping parallel tothe heating elements. Labels can be peeled offafter soaking with warm water.•Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abra-sive window cleaners on the interior surface of thewindow.•Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage tothe heating elements.144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELCONTENTSmInstrument Panel Features .................148mInstrument Cluster ......................149mInstrument Cluster Description .............150mElectronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . .159▫Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)Displays ............................161▫Engine Oil Change Indicator System ........162▫Trip Functions .......................163▫Performance Features ..................165▫Compass Display .....................169▫Driver-Selectable Surround Sound (DSS) –If Equipped .........................171▫System Warnings(Customer Information Features) ..........171▫Personal Settings(Customer Programmable Features) ........172mRadio General Information ................175▫Radio Broadcast Signals .................175▫Two Types Of Signals ..................1754
▫Electrical Disturbances ..................175▫AM Reception .......................175▫FM Reception ........................175mSales Code REQ — AM/FM Stereo RadioAnd 6–Disc CD/DVD Changer(MP3/WMA AUX Jack) ..................176▫Operating Instructions - Radio Mode .......177▫Operation Instructions - (Disc Mode For CDAnd MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-Video) ....184▫Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files ........186▫List Button(Disc Mode For MP3/WMA Play) ..........189▫Info Button(Disc Mode For MP3/WMA Play) ..........189mSales Code RER — Multimedia System —If Equipped ...........................191▫Operating Instructions — Satellite Radio .....192▫Operating Instructions — Hands-FreeCommunication (UConnectt) (If Equipped) . . .192▫Clock Setting Procedure.................193mSatellite Radio — If Equipped(REN/REQ/RER/RES/REU Radios Only) .....195▫System Activation .....................195▫Electronic Serial Number/Sirius IdentificationNumber (ESN/SID) ....................195▫Selecting Satellite Mode .................196▫Satellite Antenna ......................196▫Reception Quality .....................197146 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫Operating Instructions - Satellite Mode ......197▫Operating Instructions - Hands-Free Phone(If Equipped) ........................199mKickertHigh Performance Sound System WithDriver-Selectable Surround (DSS) –If Equipped ...........................200mRemote Sound System Controls .............201mCD/DVD Disc Maintenance ...............202mRadio Operation And Cellular Phones ........202mClimate Controls .......................203▫Manual Air Conditioning And HeatingSystem .............................203▫Operating Tips .......................206UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 1474
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES1 — Air Outlet 5 — Heated Seat Switch 9 — Ignition Switch2 — Instrument Cluster 6 — ESP OFF Switch 10 — Trunk Release Switch3 — Glove Box 7 — Hazard Warning Switch 11 — Headlight Switch4 — Radio 8 — Climate Control148 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTERUNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 1494
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTION1. Fuel GaugeThe pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank whenthe ignition switch is in the ON position.2. Trip Odometer ButtonPress this button to change the display from odometer toeither of two trip odometer settings. The letter “A” or “B”will appear when in the trip odometer mode. Push in andhold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometerto 0 mi (km). The odometer must be in TRIP mode toreset it.3. SpeedometerIndicates vehicle speed.4. Electronic Speed Control Indicator LightThis light will turn on when the electronicspeed control is on.5. TachometerThe red segments indicate the maximum permissibleengine revolutions per minute (RPM x 1000) for each gearrange. Ease up on the accelerator before reaching the redarea.6. Charging System Warning LightThis light shows the status of the electrical charg-ing system. The light should turn on when theignition switch is first turned ON and remain on brieflyas a bulb check. If the light stays on or turns on whiledriving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essentialelectrical devices (i.e., radio) or slightly increase enginespeed (if at idle). If the light remains on, it means that thecharging system is experiencing a problem. See yourlocal authorized dealer to obtain service immediately.150 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
7. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning LightThis light will turn on briefly as a bulb checkwhen the ignition switch is turned ON. Thislight will also turn on while the engine isrunning if there is a problem with the Elec-tronic Throttle Control system.If the light comes on while the engine is running, safelybring the vehicle to a complete stop as soon as possible,place the shift lever in PARK, and cycle the ignition key. Thelight should turn off. If the light remains lit with the enginerunning, your vehicle will usually be drivable. However, seeyour authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.If the light is flashing when the engine is running,immediate service is required. In this case, you mayexperience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idleor engine stall, and your vehicle may require towing.Also, have the system checked by an authorized dealer ifthe light does not come on during starting.8. Temperature GaugeThe temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera-ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates thatthe engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed toexceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.CAUTION!Driving with a hot cooling system could damageyour vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads 240°F(116°C) or greater, pull over and stop the vehicle. Idlethe vehicle with the air conditioner turned off untilthe pointer drops back into the normal range 200–230°F (93–110°C). If the pointer remains at 240°F(116°C) or greater and you hear a chime, turn theengine OFF immediately and call for service.UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 1514
WARNING!A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You orothers could be badly burned by steam or boilingcoolant. You may want to call a service center if yourvehicle overheats. If you decide to look under thehood yourself, refer to Section 7 and follow thewarnings under the Cooling System Pressure Capparagraph.9. Turn Signal Indicator LightThe arrow will flash with the exterior turn signalwhen the turn signal lever is operated.NOTE: A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle isdriven more than 1 mi (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.NOTE: Check for an inoperative outside light bulb ifeither indicator flashes at a rapid rate.10. Airbag Warning LightThis light will turn on for six to eight secondsas a bulb check when the ignition switch is firstturned ON. If the light is either not on duringstarting, or stays on, or turns on while driving,have the system inspected at your authorized dealer assoon as possible.11. Engine Temperature Warning LightThis light will turn on and a single chime willsound to warn of an overheated engine condition.When this light turns on, the engine temperatureis critically hot. The vehicle should be turned OFFimmediately and serviced as soon as possible.152 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
12. Electronic Stability Program (ESP)/TractionControl System (TCS) Indicator LightIf this indicator light flashes during accelera-tion, ease up on the accelerator and apply aslittle throttle as possible.Adapt your speed anddriving to the prevailing road conditions, anddo not switch off the ESP.13. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) / Brake AssistSystem (BAS) Warning LightThe ESP/BAS warning light will turn on whenthe key in the ignition switch is turned to theON position. The light should go out with theengine running. If the light remains on afterseveral ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been drivenseveral miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph(48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possibleto have the problem diagnosed and corrected.14. Oil Pressure Warning LightThis light shows low engine oil pressure. The lightshould turn on momentarily when the engine isstarted. If the light turns on while driving, stop thevehicle, and shut OFF the engine as soon as possible. Asingle chime will sound when this light turns on.Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.This light does not show how much oil is in the engine.The engine oil level must be checked using the procedureshown in Section 7.15. High Beam Indicator LightThis light will turn on when the high beamheadlights are on. Push the multifunction leveraway from the steering wheel to switch the headlights tohigh beam.UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 1534
16. Seat Belt Reminder LightThis light will turn on for five to eight seconds asa bulb check when the ignition switch is firstturned ON. A chime will sound if the driver’s seatbelt is unbuckled during the bulb check. The Seat BeltWarning Light will flash or remain on continuously if thedriver’s seat belt remains unbuckled after the bulb checkor when driving.17. Transmission Range IndicatorThis display indicator shows the automatic transmissiongear selection.18. Front Fog Light Indicator Light — If EquippedThis light will turn on when the front fog lights areon.19. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)DisplayThis display shows the Electronic Vehicle InformationCenter (EVIC) messages when the appropriate conditionsexist.Loose Fuel Filler Cap MessageIf the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuelfiller cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a“Check Gascap” message will display in the EVIC.Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the TRIPODOMETER button to turn off the message. If theproblem continues, the message will appear the next timethe vehicle is started.A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler capmay also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).154 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
20. Brake Warning LightThis light monitors various brake functions,including brake fluid level and parking brakeapplication. If the brake light turns on, it mayindicate that the parking brake is applied, thatthe brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem withthe Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS).The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-ity to a portion of the hydraulic system in the event of afailure. Failure of either half of the dual brake system isindicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn onwhen the brake fluid level in the master cylinder dropsbelow a specified level.The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharpcornering maneuvers, which could change fluid levelconditions. The vehicle should have service performed,and the brake fluid level checked.Immediate repair is necessary if brake failure is indicated.WARNING!Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is danger-ous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It willtake longer to stop the vehicle. You could have anaccident. Have the vehicle checked immediately.Vehicles equipped with ABS are also equipped withElectronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). Both the BrakeWarning Light and the ABS Light will turn on in theevent of an EBD failure. Immediate repair of the ABS isrequired in the event of an EBD failure.The operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checkedby turning the ignition switch from the LOCK position tothe ON position. The light should turn on for approxi-mately two seconds and then turn off. The light willUNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 1554
remain on if the parking brake is applied or if a brakefault is detected. If the parking brake is not applied andthe light remains on, or if the light does not turn on, havethe light inspected by an authorized dealer.NOTE: The light will turn on when the ignition switchis in the ON position and the parking brake is applied.This light shows only that the parking brake is applied. Itdoes not show the degree of brake application.21. Vehicle Security Alarm (VSA) Indicator Light — IfEquippedThe VSA Indicator Light flashes rapidly when the VSA isarming, and slowly when the VSA is armed.22. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light — IfEquipped Each tire, including the spare (if provided),should be checked monthly when cold andinflated to the inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicleplacard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehiclehas tires of a different size than the size indicated on thevehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you shoulddetermine the proper tire inflation pressure for thosetires.)As an added safety feature, your vehicle has beenequipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one ormore of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accord-ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires as soon as possible, andinflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-cantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat andcan lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuelefficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’shandling and stopping ability.Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for propertire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to156 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation hasnot reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMSlow tire pressure telltale.Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMSmalfunction indicator to indicate when the system is notoperating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator iscombined with the low tire pressure telltale. When thesystem detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and then remain continuouslyilluminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys-tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressureas intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a varietyof reasons, including the installation of replacement oralternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent theTPMS from functioning properly. Always check theTPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replace-ment or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS tocontinue to function properly.CAUTION!The TPMS has been optimized for the originalequipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures andwarning have been established for the tire sizeequipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-tion or sensor damage may result when using re-placement equipment that is not of the same size,type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can causesensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire sealantsor balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with aTPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 1574
23. Anti-Lock Brake Warning LightThis light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignitionswitch is turned to the ON position and may stay on foras long as four seconds.If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving,then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is notfunctioning and service is required. However, the con-ventional brake system will continue to operate normallyif the BRAKE warning light is not on.If theABS light is on, the brake system should be servicedas soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-LockBrakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when theignition switch is turned to the ON position, have thelight inspected by an authorized dealer.24. Low Fuel Warning LightThis light will turn on and a single chime willsound when the fuel level drops to 1/8 tank.25. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)This light is part of an onboard diagnostic systemcalled OBD. The OBD system monitors engineand automatic transmission control systems. TheMIL will turn on when the key is in the ON positionbefore engine start. If the MIL does not come on whenturning the key from LOCK to ON, have the conditionchecked promptly.Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap,poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the MIL afterengine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the MILstays on through several of your typical driving cycles. Inmost situations, the vehicle will drive normally and willnot require towing.The MIL flashes to alert you to serious conditions thatcould lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalyticconverter damage. The vehicle should be serviced assoon as possible if this occurs.158 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER(EVIC)The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-tures a driver-interactive display. It is located in theinstrument cluster below the speedometer. Vehiclesequipped with steering wheel-mounted buttons (de-scribed in this section) are also equipped with the EVIC.The EVIC consists of the following:•System Status•Vehicle Information Warning Message Displays•Tire Pressure Monitor System•Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features)•Compass Display•Outside Temperature Display•Trip Computer Functions•UConnecttHands-Free Communication System Dis-plays (If Equipped)•Navigation System Screens (If Equipped)•Audio Mode DisplayElectronic Vehicle Information CenterUNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 1594
•Surround Sound Modes (If Equipped with Driver-Selectable Surround [DSS])•Performance FeaturesThe system allows the driver to select information bypressing the following buttons mounted on the steeringwheel.MENU ButtonPress and release the MENU button and themode displayed will change between TripFunctions, Performance Pages, Navigation (IfEquipped), System Warnings, System Status,Personal Settings, Telephone (If Equipped), and Sur-round Sound (If Equipped).FUNCTION SELECT ButtonPress the FUNCTION SELECT button to accepta selection. The FUNCTION SELECT buttonalso functions as a remote sound system control. Refer to“Remote Sound System Controls” in this section.SCROLL ButtonPress the SCROLLbutton to scroll through TripFunctions, Performance Pages, Navigation (IfEquipped), System Status Messages, and Per-sonal Settings (Customer Programmable Fea-tures). The SCROLL button also functions as a remotesound system control. Refer to “Remote Sound SystemControls” in this section.AUDIO MODE ButtonPress the AUDIO MODE button to select theCompass/Temp/Audio screen. Along withcompass reading and outside temperature, thisscreen will display radio and media modeinformation depending on which radio is in the vehicle.Refer to “Remote Sound System Controls” in this section.160 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)DisplaysWhen the appropriate conditions exist, the ElectronicVehicle Information Center (EVIC) displays the followingmessages:•Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning chime ifthe vehicle is driven more than 1 mi [1.6 km] witheither turn signal on)•Left Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)•Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)•Right Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a singlechime)•Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)•RKE Battery Low (with a single chime)•Personal Settings NotAvailable – Vehicle Not in PARK•Left/Right Door Ajar•Door(s) Ajar (with a single chime if vehicle is inmotion)•Trunk Ajar (with a single chime)•Oil Change Required•Low Washer Fluid (with a single chime)•Channel # Transmit•Channel # Training•Channel # Trained•Clearing Channels•Channels Cleared•Did Not Train•Left Front Low Pressure (with a single chime)UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 1614
•Left Rear Low Pressure (with a single chime)•Right Front Low Pressure (with a single chime)•Right Rear Low Pressure (with a single chime)•Check TPM System (with a single chime)•ESP Off•Check Gascap•Insert Key/Turn To Run•Upshift•Stereo (If Equipped with Driver-Selectable SurroundSound [DSS])•Audio Surround (If Equipped with Driver-SelectableSurround Sound [DSS])•0-60 mph (0-100 km/h)•Braking Distance•1/8 Mile•1/4 Mile•Instantaneous G-Force•Peak G-Force•Digital SpeedometerEngine Oil Change Indicator SystemOil Change RequiredYour vehicle is equipped with an engine oil changeindicator system. The “Oil Change Required” messagewill flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10seconds after a single chime has sounded, to indicate thenext scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil changeindicator system is duty cycle based, which means theengine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependentupon your personal driving style.162 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Unless reset, this message will continue to display eachtime you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUNposition. To turn off the message temporarily, press andrelease the MENU button. To reset the oil change indica-tor system (after performing the scheduled maintenance)refer to the following procedure.1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (Do notstart the engine).2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three timeswithin 10 seconds.3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when youstart the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did notreset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.Trip FunctionsPress and release the MENU button until one of thefollowing Trip Functions displays in the EVIC:•Average Fuel Economy•Distance To Empty•Trip A•Trip B•Elapsed Time•Display Units of Measure inUNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 1634
Press the SCROLL button to cycle through all the TripComputer functions.The Trip Functions mode displays the following.Average Fuel EconomyShows the average fuel economy since the last reset.When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read“RESET” or show dashes for two seconds. Then, thehistory information will be erased, and the averaging willcontinue from the last fuel average reading before thereset.Distance To Empty (DTE)Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled withthe fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance isdetermined by a weighted average of the instantaneousand average fuel economy, according to the current fueltank level. DTE cannot be reset through the FUNCTIONSELECT button.NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicleloading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance ofthe vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.When the DTE value is less than 30 mi (48 km) estimateddriving distance, the DTE display will change to a textdisplay of 9LOW FUEL.9This display will continue untilthe vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a significant amountof fuel to the vehicle will turn off the 9LOW FUEL9textand a new DTE value will display.Trip AShows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the lastreset.Trip BShows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the lastreset.164 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Elapsed TimeShows the total elapsed time of travel since the last resetwhen the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsedtime will increment when the ignition switch is in the ONor START position.Display Units of Measure inTo make your selection, press and release the FUNC-TION SELECT button until “US” or “METRIC” appears.To Reset The DisplayReset will only occur while a resettable function is beingdisplayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECTbutton once to clear the resettable function being dis-played. To reset all resettable functions, press and releasethe FUNCTION SELECT button a second time withinthree seconds of resetting the currently-displayed func-tion (>Reset ALL will display during this three-secondwindow).Performance FeaturesWARNING!Measurement of vehicle statistics with the Perfor-mance Features is intended for off-highway or off-road use only and should not be done on any publicroadways. It is recommended that these features beused in a controlled environment and within thelimits of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle asmeasured by the performance pages must never beexploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, whichcan jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety ofothers. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver canprevent accidents.UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 1654
The Performance Features include the following:•0-60 mph (0-100 km/h)•Braking Distance•1/8 Mile•1/4 Mile•Instantaneous G-Force•Peak G-Force•Digital SpeedometerTo access, press and release the MENU button untilPerformance Features displays in the EVIC. Press theSCROLL button to cycle through the features. Press theFUNCTION SELECT button to select a feature.The following describes each feature and its operation:0-60 mph (0-100 km/h)When selected, this screen displays the time it takes forthe vehicle to go from 0 to 60 mph (0 to 100 km/h) within10 seconds.•The feature will “ready” when the vehicle speed is at0 mph (0 km/h). The word “READY” will flash whenconditions are met for the event to begin.•Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 60 mph(100 km/h) in less then 10 seconds.•The time will continue to display until the FUNCTIONSELECT button is pressed.•Pressing the FUNCTION SELECT button will clear thecurrent run time and display the vehicle’s best 0-60mph (0-100 km/h) time.•To clear the vehicle’s best 0-60 mph (0-100 km/h) time,press and hold the FUNCTION SELECT button forfive seconds.166 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Braking DistanceWhen selected, this screen displays the vehicle’s brakingdistance and the speed at which the brake pedal wasdepressed.•This feature will only function when applying thebrakes at speeds above 30 mph (48 km/h).•Engaging the parking brake will disable this feature.•The word “READY” will flash when conditions aremet for the event to begin.•The distance and speed measurements display whilethe event is taking place.•The distance measurement will be aborted if the brakepedal is released before the vehicle comes to a com-plete stop.•The distance and speed measurements will continue todisplay until the FUNCTION SELECT button ispressed.•Pressing the FUNCTION SELECT button will clear thecurrent run and prepare the cluster to record a newrun.1/8 Mile, 1/4 MileWhen selected, this screen displays the time it takes thevehicle to travel 1/8 mile (1/4 mile) within 30 secondsand the vehicle’s speed when it reaches 1/8 mile (1/4mile).•The feature will “ready” when the vehicle is at 0 mph(0 km/h). The word “READY” will flash when condi-tions are met for the event to begin.•Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 1/8mile (1/4 mile) in less then 30 seconds.UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 1674
•The time and speed will continue to display until theFUNCTION SELECT button is pressed.•Pressing the FUNCTION SELECT button will clear thecurrent run and display the vehicle’s best 1/8 mile(1/4 mile) run.•To clear the vehicle’s best 1/8 mile (1/4 mile) run,press and hold the FUNCTION SELECT button forfive seconds.Instantaneous G-ForceWhen selected, this screen displays the current G-Force(longitude and latitude) along with a friction circle thatdisplays the directions of the forces.Peak G-ForceWhen selected, this screen displays all four G-Forcevalues (two longitude and two latitude).•When a force greater than zero is measured, thedisplay will update the value as it climbs. As theG-Force falls, the peak forces will continue to display.•Pressing the FUNCTION SELECT button will clear thepeak force values.Digital SpeedometerWhen selected, this screen displays vehicle speed andrecords top speed.•Press and hold the FUNCTION SELECT button forthree seconds to toggle between current speed and topspeed.•To reset top speed, quickly press and release theFUNCTION SELECT button when top speed is dis-played.168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Compass DisplayCOMPASS ButtonThe compass readings indicate the directionthe vehicle is facing. Press and release theCOMPASS button to display one of eight com-pass readings and the outside temperature.Automatic Compass CalibrationThis compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates theneed to set the compass manually. When the vehicle isnew, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC willdisplay “CAL” until the compass is calibrated. You mayalso calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360degree turns (in an area free from large metal or metallicobjects) until the “CAL” message displayed in the EVICturns off. The compass will now function normally.Manual Compass CalibrationIf the compass appears erratic and the “CAL” messagedoes not appear in the EVIC display, you must put thecompass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows:1. Turn the ignition switch ON.2. Press and hold the COMPASS button for approxi-mately two seconds.3. Press the SCROLL button until “Calibrate Compass”displays in the EVIC.4. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button tostart the calibration. The message “CAL” will display inthe EVIC.5. Complete one or more 360 degree turns (in an area freefrom large metal or metallic objects) until the “CAL”message turns off. The compass will now function nor-mally.UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 1694
Compass VarianceCompass Variance is the difference between magneticNorth and geographic North. In some areas of thecountry, the difference between magnetic and geographicNorth is great enough to cause the compass to give falsereadings. If this occurs, the compass variance must be setusing the following procedure:NOTE: Magnetic materials should be kept away fromthe overhead console. This is where the compass sensor islocated.Compass Variance Map170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
1. Turn the ignition switch ON.2. Press and hold the COMPASS button for approxi-mately two seconds.3. Press the SCROLL button until “Compass Variance”message and the last variance zone number displays inthe EVIC.4.Press and release FUNCTION SELECT button until theproper variance zone is selected according to the map.5. Press and release the COMPASS button to exit.Driver-Selectable Surround Sound (DSS) – IfEquippedPress and release the MENU button until “SurroundSound” displays in the EVIC. The EVIC provides infor-mation on the current surround mode.•Stereo•Audio SurroundWhile in the Surround Sound menu, press the FUNC-TION SELECT button to change surround modes.System Warnings (Customer InformationFeatures)Press and release the MENU button until “SYSTEMWARNINGS” displays in the EVIC. Then, press theSCROLL button to display anyone of the followingchoices.•Oil TemperatureShows the actual oil temperature.•Oil PressureShows the actual oil pressure.•Tire PressureShows the actual tire pressure for each tire (EXCLUDINGTHE SPARE TIRE).UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 1714
Personal Settings (Customer ProgrammableFeatures)Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recallfeatures when the transmission is in PARK.Press and release the MENU button until Personal Set-tings displays in the EVIC.Use the SCROLL button to display one of the followingchoices.LanguageWhen in this display you may select one of three languagesfor all display nomenclature, including the trip functionsand the navigation system (if equipped). Press the FUNC-TION SELECT button while in this display to select En-glish, Espanol, or Francais. Then, as you continue, theinformation will display in the selected language.NOTE: The EVIC will not change the UConnecttlan-guage selection. Refer to “Language Selection” under“Hands-Free Communication (UConnectt)” in Section 3.Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph (24 km/h)When ON is selected, both doors will lock automaticallywhen the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h).To make your selection, press and release the FUNC-TION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.Unlock Doors Automatically on ExitWhen ON is selected, both doors will unlock when thevehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK orNEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened. Tomake your selection, press and release the FUNCTIONSELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.Remote Key UnlockWhen Driver Door 1st Press is selected, only the driver’sdoor will unlock on the first press of the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) UNLOCK button. When Driver Door 1stPress is selected, you must press the RKE UNLOCKbutton twice to unlock the passenger door. When AllDoors 1st Press is selected, both of the doors will unlock172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
on the first press of the RKE UNLOCK button. To makeyour selection, press and release the FUNCTION SE-LECT button until “Driver Door 1st Press” or “All Doors1st Press” appears.Sound Horn with Remote Key LockWhen ON is selected, a short horn sound will occur whenthe RKE LOCK button is pressed. This feature may beselected with or without the flash lights on lock/unlockfeature. To make your selection, press and release theFUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” ap-pears.Flash Lights with Remote Key LockWhen ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals willflash when the doors are locked or unlocked with theRKE transmitter. This feature may be selected with orwithout the sound horn on lock feature selected. To makeyour selection, press and release the FUNCTION SE-LECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.Headlamps On with Wipers (Available with AutoHeadlights Only)When ON is selected, and the headlight switch is in theAUTO (A) position, the headlights will turn on approxi-mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. Theheadlights will also turn off when the wipers are turnedoff if they were turned on by this feature. To make yourselection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECTbutton until “ON” or “OFF” appears.NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytimecauses the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase thebrightness, refer to “Lights” in Section 3.Delay Turning Headlights OffWhen this feature is selected, the driver can choose tohave the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 secondswhen exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, pressand release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “0,”“30,” “60,” or “90” appears.UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 1734
Turn Headlights On with Remote Key UnlockWhen this feature is selected, the headlights will activateand remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors areunlocked with the RKE transmitter. To make your selec-tion, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT buttonuntil “OFF,” “30 sec.,” “60 sec.,” or “90 sec.” appears.Delay Power Off to Accessories Until ExitWhen this feature is selected, the power windowswitches, radio, hands-free system (if equipped), powersunroof (if equipped), and ignition-powered power out-lets will remain active for up to 60 minutes after theignition switch is turned OFF. Opening a vehicle doorwill cancel this feature. To make your selection, press andrelease the FUNCTION SELECT button until “Off,” “45sec.,” “5 min.,” “10 min.,” “30 min.,” or “60 min.”appears.Turn-by-Turn Navigation — If EquippedWhen ON is selected, the Turn-by-Turn directions willappear in the display as the vehicle approaches a desig-nated turn within a programmed route. To make yourselection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECTbutton until “ON” or “OFF” appears.Display Units of Measure InThe EVIC, odometer, and navigation system (ifequipped) can be changed between English and Metricunits of measure. To make your selection, press andrelease the FUNCTION SELECT button until “US” or“METRIC” appears.174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RADIO GENERAL INFORMATIONRadio Broadcast SignalsYour new radio will provide excellent reception undermost operating conditions. Like any system, however, carradios have performance limitations, due to mobile op-eration and natural phenomena, which might lead you tobelieve your sound system is malfunctioning. To helpyou understand and save you concern about these “ap-parent” malfunctions, you must understand a point ortwo about the transmission and reception of radio sig-nals.Two Types of SignalsThere are two basic types of radio signals: AM orAmplitude Modulation, in which the transmitted soundcauses the amplitude, or height, of the radio waves tovary; and FM or Frequency Modulation, in which thefrequency of the wave is varied to carry the sound.Electrical DisturbancesRadio waves may pick up electrical disturbances duringtransmission. They mainly affect the wave amplitude,and thus remain a part of the AM reception. Theyinterfere very little with the frequency variations thatcarry the FM signal.AM ReceptionAM sound is based on wave amplitude, so AM receptioncan be disrupted by such things as lightning, power linesand neon signs.FM ReceptionBecause FM transmission is based on frequency varia-tions, interference that consists of amplitude variationscan be filtered out, leaving the reception relatively clear,which is the major feature of FM radio.UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 1754
NOTE: The radio, steering wheel radio controls, and6-disc CD/DVD changer (if equipped) will remain activefor up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turnedOFF. Opening either door will cancel this feature. Thetime is programmable. Refer to “Delay Power Off toAccessories Until Exit,” under “Personal Settings (Cus-tomer Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Ve-hicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4.SALES CODE REQ — AM/FM STEREO RADIOAND 6–DISC CD/DVD CHANGER (MP3/WMA AUXJACK)NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower rightside of your radio faceplate.RET Radio176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Instructions - Radio ModeNOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACCposition to operate the radio.Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on theradio. Press the ON/VOLUME control knob a secondtime to turn off the radio.Electronic Volume ControlThe electronic volume control turns continuously (360degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning theON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases thevolume and to the left decreases it.When the audio system is turned ON, the sound will beset at the same volume level as last played.SEEK ButtonsPress and release the SEEK buttons to search for the nextlistenable station inAM/FM mode. Press the right switchto seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radiowill remain tuned to the new station until you makeanother selection. Holding either button will bypassstations without stopping until you release it.SCAN ButtonPressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search forthe next listenable station, in AM, FM or Satellite (ifequipped) frequencies, pausing for five seconds at eachlistenable station before continuing to the next. To stopthe search, press the SCAN button a second time.Voice Recognition Button (UConnecttHands-FreePhone) — If EquippedPress this button to operate the Hands-Free Phone(UConnectt) feature (if equipped). Refer to “Hands-FreeCommunication (UConnectt)” in Section 3.If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is notavailable on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped WithUConnect” message will display on the radio screen.UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 1774
Phone Button (UConnecttHands-Free Phone) — IfEquippedPress this button to operate the Hands-Free Phone(UConnectt) feature (if equipped). Refer to “Hands-FreeCommunication (UConnectt)” in Section 3.If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is notavailable on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped WithUConnect” message will display on the radio screen.TIME ButtonPress the TIME button and the time of day will display. InAM or FM mode, pressing the TIME button will switchbetween the time and frequency displays.Clock Setting Procedure1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/SCROLL control knob.3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minuteswill begin to blink.4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL controlknob to save the time change.5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP buttonand selecting the “SET HOME CLOCK” entry. Once inthis display follow the above procedure, starting at step2.INFO ButtonPress the INFO button for an RDS station (one with callletters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Textmessage broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RW/FFPressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttonscauses the tuner to search for the next frequency in thedirection of the arrows. This feature operates in AM, FMor Satellite (if equipped) frequencies.TUNE ControlTurn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwiseto increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.Setting the Tone, Balance, and FadePush the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASSwill display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob tothe right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a secondtime and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLLcontrol knob to the right or left to increase or decrease themid-range tones.Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a thirdtime and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLLcontrol knob to the right or left to increase or decrease thetreble tones.Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourthtime and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust thesound level from the right or left side speakers.Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLLcontrol knob a fifth timeand FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL controlknob to the left or right to adjust the sound level betweenthe front and rear speakers.Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again toexit setting tone, balance, and fade.UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 1794
MUSIC TYPE ButtonPressing this button once will turn on the Music Typemode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE buttonor turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within fiveseconds will allow the program format type to be se-lected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcastMusic Type information.Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the followingformat types:Program Type 16-Digit Character DisplayNo program type or un-defined NoneAdult Hits Adlt HitClassical ClassiclClassic Rock Cls RockCollege CollegeCountry CountryForeign Language LanguageProgram Type 16-Digit Character DisplayInformation InformJazz JazzNews NewsNostalgia NostalgaOldies OldiesPersonality PersnltyPublic PublicRhythm and Blues R & BReligious Music Rel MuscReligious Talk Rel TalkRock RockSoft SoftSoft Rock Soft RckSoft Rhythm and Blues SoftR&BSports SportsTalk Talk180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Program Type 16-Digit Character DisplayTop 40 Top 40Weather WeatherBy pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type iconis displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequencystation with the same selected Music Type name. TheMusic Type function only operates when in the FMmode.If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will beexited and the radio will tune to the preset station.SETUP ButtonPressing the SETUP button allows you to select betweenthe following items:NOTE: Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scrollthrough the entries. Push the AUDIO/SELECT button toselect an entry and make changes.•DVD Enter - When the disc is in DVD Menu mode,selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the currenthighlighted selection. Use the remote control to scrollup and down the menu (if equipped).•DISC Play/Pause - You can toggle betweenplaying the DVD and pausing the DVD bypushing the SELECT button (if equipped).•DVD Play Options - Selecting the DVD Play Optionswill display the following:•Subtitle – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switchsubtitles to different subtitle languages that areavailable on the disc (if equipped).•Audio Stream – Repeatedly pressing SELECT willswitch to different audio languages (if supported onthe disc) (if equipped).UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 1814
•Angle – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will changethe viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc (ifequipped).NOTE: The available selections for each of the aboveentries varies depending upon the disc.NOTE: These selections can only be made while playinga DVD.•Set Home Clock - Pressing the SELECT button allowsyou to set the clock. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL controlknob to adjust the hours and then press and turn theTUNE/SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes.Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to savechanges.•Player Defaults - Selecting this item will allow theuser to scroll through the following items, and setdefaults according to customer preference.Menu Language — If EquippedSelecting this item will allow the user to choose thedefault startup DVD menu language (effective only iflanguage supported by disc). If you want to select alanguage not listed, then scroll down and select 9other.9Enter the four-digit country code using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select thenumber and then push to select.Audio Language — If EquippedSelecting this item allows you to choose a default audiolanguage (effective only if the language is supported bythe disc). You can select a language not listed by scrollingdown and selecting 9other.9Enter the country code usingthe TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and downto select the number and then push to select.182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Subtitle Language — If EquippedSelecting this item allows you to choose a default subtitlelanguage (effective only if the language is supported bythe disc). You can select a language not listed by scrollingdown and selecting 9other.9Enter the country code usingthe TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and downto select the number and then push to select.Subtitles — If EquippedSelecting this item allows you to choose between subtitleOff or On.Audio DRC — If EquippedSelecting this item allows you to limit maximum audiodynamic range. The default is set to 9High,9and underthis setting, dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if thesetting is 9Normal.9Aspect Ratio — If EquippedSelecting this item allows you to choose between widescreen, pan scan, and letter box.AutoPlay — If EquippedWhen this is set to On and a DVD video is inserted, it willbypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play themovie. In some rare cases, the DVD player may notauto-play the main title. In such cases, use the MENUbutton on the remote control to select desired title to play.NOTE: The user will have to set these defaults beforeloading a disc. If changes are made to these settings aftera disc is loaded, changes will not be effective. Also, thedefaults are effective only if the disc supports thecustomer-preferred settings.AM and FM ButtonsPress the buttons to select AM or FM Modes.UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 1834
SET Button — To Set the Pushbutton MemoryWhen you are receiving a station that you wish tocommit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this stationand press and release that button. If a button is notselected within five seconds after pressing the SET but-ton, the station will continue to play but will not bestored into pushbutton memory.You may add a second station to each pushbutton byrepeating the above procedure with this exception: Pressthe SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the displaywindow. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 inboth AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM, 12 FM,and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored intopushbutton memory. The stations stored in SET 2memory can be selected by pressing the pushbuttontwice.Every time a preset button is used, a correspondingbutton number will display.Buttons1-6These buttons tune the radio to the stations that youcommit to pushbutton memory {12 AM, 12 FM, and 12Satellite (if equipped) stations}.DISC ButtonPressing the DISC button will allow you to switch fromAM/FM modes to Disc modes.Operation Instructions - (DISC MODE for CD andMP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-VIDEO)The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded bygeographic region. These region codes must match inorder for the disc to play. If the region code for the DVDdisc does not match the region code for the radio DVDplayer, it will not play the disc. Customers may take theirvehicle to an authorized dealer to change the region codeof the player a maximum of five times.184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!The radio may shut down during extremely hotconditions. When this occurs, the radio will indicate“Disc Hot” and shut off until a safe temperature isreached. This shutdown is necessary to protect theoptics of the DVD player and other radio internalcomponents.NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACCposition to operate the radio.LOAD Button — Loading Compact Disc(s)Press the LOAD button and the pushbutton with thecorresponding number (1-6) where the CD is beingloaded. The radio will display PLEASE WAIT andprompt when to INSERT DISC. After the radio displays9INSERT DISC,9insert the CD into the player.Radio display will show 9LOADING DISC9when the discis loading and “READING DISC” when the radio isreading the disc.CAUTION!This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs only.The use of other sized discs may damage the CDplayer mechanism.Eject Button — Ejecting Compact Disc(s)Press the EJECT button and the pushbuttonwith the corresponding number (1-6) where theCD was loaded and the disc will unload andmove to the entrance for easy removal. Radiodisplay will show 9EJECTING DISC9when the disc isbeing ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 1854
Press and hold the EJECT button for five seconds and allCDs will be ejected from the radio.The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.SEEK Button (CD MODE)Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on theCD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginningof the current selection, or return to the beginning of theprevious selection if the CD is within the first second ofthe current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEKbutton will allow you to scroll through the tracks faster inCD, MP3/MWA modes.SCAN Button (CD MODE)Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on theCD currently playing.TIME Button (CD MODE)Press this button to change the display from a large CDplaying time display to a small CD playing time display.RW/FF (CD MODE)Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player willbegin to fast forward until FF is released, or RW oranother CD button is pressed. The RW (Rewind) buttonworks in a similar manner.AM or FM Button (CD MODE)Switches the radio to the Radio mode.Notes On Playing MP3/WMA FilesThe radio can play MP3/WMAfiles; however, acceptableMP3/WMAfile recording media and formats are limited.When writing MP3/WMA files, pay attention to thefollowing restrictions.Supported Media (Disc Types)The MP3/WMA file recording media supported by theradio are CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3,WMA, DVD Video,DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+RW, and CDDA+MP3.186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.When reading discs recorded using formats other thanISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to readfiles properly and may be unable to play the file nor-mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.The radio uses the following limits for file systems:•Maximum number of directory levels: 8•Maximum number of files: 255•Maximum number of folders: 100•Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:•Level 1: 12 (including a separator 9.9and a three-character extension)•Level 2: 31 (including a separator 9.9and a three-character extension)Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.Multisession discs may contain combinations of normalCD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3/WMA files). Discs created with an option such as 9keepdisc open after writing9are most likely multisessiondiscs. The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3/WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times.If a disc contains multi-formats, such as CD audio andMP3/WMA tracks, the radio will only play the MP3/WMA tracks on that disc.Supported MP3/WMA File FormatsThe radio will recognize only files with the MP3/WMAextension as MP3/WMA files. Non-MP3/WMA filesnamed with the MP3/WMA extension may cause play-back problems. The radio is designed to recognize the fileas an invalid MP3/WMA and will not play the file.UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 1874
When using the MP3/WMA encoder to compress audiodata to an MP3/WMA file, the bit rate and samplingfrequencies in the following table are supported. Inaddition, variable bit rates (VBR) are also supported. Themajority of MP3/WMAfiles use a 44.1 kHz sampling rateand a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR bit rates.MPEG Specifi-cation Sampling Fre-quency (kHz) Bit Rate (kbps)MPEG-1 AudioLayer 3 48, 44.1, 32 320, 256, 224,192, 160, 128,112, 96, 80, 64,56, 48MPEG-2 AudioLayer 3 24, 22.05, 16 160, 128, 144,112, 96, 80, 64,56, 48WMA Specifica-tion Sampling Fre-quency (kHz) Bit Rate (kbps)WMA 44.1 and 48 48, 64, 96, 128,160, 192 VBRID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album titleare supported for ID3 version 1 tags. ID3 version 2 is notsupported by the radios.Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are notsupported.Playback of MP3/WMA FilesWhen a medium containing MP3/WMA data is loaded,the radio checks all files on the medium. If the mediumcontains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take moretime to start playing the MP3/WMA files.Loading times for playback of MP3/WMA files may beaffected by the following:•Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load thanCD-R media•Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longerto load than non-multisession discs188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•Number of files and folders - Loading times willincrease with more files and foldersTo increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommendedto use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create asingle-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” optionbefore writing to the disc.LIST Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folderson the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done byturning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting afolder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob willbegin playing the files contained in that folder (or thenext folder in sequence if the selection does not containplayable files).The folder list will time out after five seconds.INFO Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll throughthe following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, FileName, and Folder Name (if available).Press the INFO button once more to return to 9elapsedtime9priority mode.Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds ormore and radio will display song titles for each file.Press and hold the INFO button again for three secondsto return to 9elapsed time9display.Operation Instructions - Auxiliary ModeThe auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, whichallows the user to plug in a portable device such as anMP3/WMA player, cassette player, or microphone andutilize the vehicle’s audio system to amplify the sourceand play through the vehicle speakers.UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 1894
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil-iary device if the AUX jack is connected.NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and thedevice’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audiois not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If theAUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volumedown.SEEK Button (Auxiliary Mode)No function.SCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)No function.EJECT Button (Auxiliary Mode)No function.TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)Press the TIME button to change the display fromelapsed playing time to time of day. The time of day willdisplay for five seconds.RW/FF (Auxiliary Mode)No function.SET Button (Auxiliary Mode)No function.Operating Instructions — Voice RecognitionSystem (VR) (If Equipped)For the radio, refer to “Voice Recognition System (VR)” inSection 3.For UConnectt“Voice Recognition System (VR),” refer to“Hands-Free Communication (UConnectt)” in Section 3.190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Instructions - Hands-Free Phone(UConnectt) (If Equipped)Refer to “Hands-Free Communication (UConnectt)” inSection 3.Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (IfEquipped)Refer to “Satellite Radio” in this section.DolbytManufactured under license from DolbytLaboratories.9Dolbyt9 and the double-D symbol are trademarks ofDolbytLaboratories.MacrovisionThis product incorporates copyright protection technol-ogy that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellec-tual property rights. Use of this copyright protectiontechnology must be authorized by Macrovision, and isintended for home and other limited viewing uses only,unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverseengineering or disassembly is prohibitedDTS™9DTS™9and 9DTS™ 2.09are trademarks of Digital The-ater Systems, Inc.SALES CODE RER — MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM — IFEQUIPPEDNOTE: The sales code is located on the lower right sideof the unit’s faceplate.The RER Multimedia system contains a radio, SiriusSatellite Radio player, navigation system, CD/DVDplayer, USB port, 20-gigabyte hard drive (HDD), and theUConnecttHands-Free Bluetoothtcellular system.UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 1914
NOTE: If your vehicle is not equipped with UConnectt,the unit will respond with a “Not Equipped WithUConnectt” message when selecting controls related tothis feature.A 6.5 in (16.5 cm) touch screen allows easy menu selec-tion, while theAdvanced Voice Dialog System recognizesmore than 1,000 words for audio, navigation, entertain-ment, and hands-free mobile phone use.The satellite navigation capability combines a Global-Positioning System (GPS)-based navigation system withan integrated color screen to provide maps, turn identi-fication, selection menus, and instructions for selecting avariety of destinations and routes.A shared HDD for the navigation system, the database,and other radio features allows uploads of music andphotos from CDs or through the USB port. The Gracenotedatabase finds the artist, track, and title for the music.Other special features include direct tune, music typeselections, traffic messaging (optional), easy store presets,backup camera display for vehicles equipped with abackup camera, and on some models, a dual displayscreen operation. Refer to your “Navigation User’sManual” for detailed operating instructions.Operating Instructions — Satellite RadioRefer to your “Navigation User’s Manual” for detailedoperating instructions.Operating Instructions — Hands-FreeCommunication (UConnectT) (If Equipped)Refer to your “Navigation User’s Manual” for detailedoperating instructions.192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Clock Setting ProcedureThe GPS receiver in this system is synchronized to thetime data being transmitted by the GPS satellites. Thesatellites’ clock is Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). This isthe worldwide standard for time. This makes the sys-tem’s clock very accurate once the appropriate time zoneand daylight savings information is set.Changing the Time Zone1. Turn on the multimedia system.2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. Theclock setting menu will appear on the screen. If the words“Time: GPS Time” are displayed at the top of the screen,proceed to Step 4. Otherwise, proceed to Step 3.3. If the words “Time: User Clock” are displayed at thetop of the screen, touch the bottom of the screen wherethe words “User Clock” are displayed. The GPS timesetting menu will appear on the screen.4. Touch the screen where the words “Set Time Zone” aredisplayed. The time zone selection menu will appear onthe screen.5. Select a time zone by touching the screen where yourselection appears. If you do not see a time zone that youwant to select, touch the screen where the word “Page” isdisplayed to view additional time zones in the menu.Changing Daylight Savings TimeWhen selected, this feature will display the time of day indaylight savings time. Proceed as follows to change thecurrent setting:1. Turn on the multimedia system.2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. Theclock setting menu will appear on the screen.UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 1934
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear inthe box next to the words “Daylight Savings.” Touch thescreen where the words “Daylight Savings” are dis-played to change the current setting.Setting the User ClockIf you wish to set the clock to a time different from thesystem clock, you can manually adjust the time byperforming the following:1. Turn on the multimedia system.2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. Theclock setting menu will appear on the screen. If the words“Time: User Clock” are displayed at the top of the screen,proceed to Step 4. Otherwise, proceed to Step 3.3. If the words “Time: GPS Time” are displayed at the topof the screen, touch the bottom of the screen where thewords “GPS Time” are displayed. The user clock timesetting menu will appear on the screen.4. To move the hour forward, touch the screen where theword “Hour” with the arrow pointing upward is dis-played. To move the hour backward, touch the screenwhere the word “Hour” with the arrow pointing down-ward is displayed.5. To move the minute forward, touch the screen wherethe word “Min” with the arrow pointing upward isdisplayed. To move the minute backward, touch thescreen where the word “Min” with the arrow pointingdownward is displayed.6. To save the new time setting, touch the screen wherethe word “Save” is displayed.Show Time if Radio is OffWhen selected, this feature will display the time of dayon the touch screen when the system is turned off.Proceed as follows to change the current setting:1. Turn on the multimedia system.194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. Theclock setting menu will appear on the screen.3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear inthe box next to the words “Show Time if Radio is Off.”Touch the screen where the words “Show Time if Radio isOff” are displayed to change the current setting.SATELLITE RADIO — IF EQUIPPED(REN/REQ/RER/RES/REU RADIOS ONLY)Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcast-ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast tocoast. The subscription service provider is Sirius SatelliteRadio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chil-dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and haslimited coverage in Alaska.System ActivationSirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and youmay begin listening immediately to the one year of audioservice that is included with the factory-installed satelliteradio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a wel-come kit that contains general information, includinghow to setup your on-line listening account at no addi-tional charge. For further information, call the toll-freenumber 888-539-7474, or visit the Sirius web site atwww.sirius.com, or at www.siriuscanada.ca for Cana-dian residents.Electronic Serial Number/Sirius IdentificationNumber (ESN/SID)Please have the following information available whencalling:1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius IdentificationNumber (ESN/SID).2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 1954
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:ESN/SID Access With REQ/RES RadiosWith the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC posi-tion and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scrollusing the Tune/Scroll control knob until Sirius ID isselected. Press the Tune/Scroll control knob and theSirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID numberdisplay will time out in two minutes. Press any button onthe radio to exit this screen.ESN/SID Access With REN/RER RadiosWhile in SAT mode, press the MENU button on the radiofaceplate.Next, touch the SUBSCRIPTION tab on the touch screen.All the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display.ESN/SID Access With REU RadioWhile in SAT mode, press the MENU button on the radiofaceplate.Next, turn the knob surrounding the joystick in the centerof the radio to scroll to Subscription, and then press andrelease the joystick. All of the ESNs that apply to yourvehicle will display.Selecting Satellite ModePress the SAT button until 9SAT9appears in the display.ACD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radiomode.Satellite AntennaTo ensure optimum reception, do not place items on theroof around the rooftop antenna location or strap items tothe trunk lid around the trunk lid antenna (if equipped).Metal objects placed within the line of sight of theantenna will cause decreased performance. Larger lug-gage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearwardas possible, within the loading design of the rack. Do notplace items directly on or above the antenna.196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Reception QualitySatellite reception may be interrupted due to one of thefollowing reasons:•The vehicle is parked in an underground parkingstructure or under a physical obstacle.•Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in theform of short audio mutes.•Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings cancause intermittent reception.•Placing objects over or too close to the antenna cancause signal blockage.Operating Instructions - Satellite ModeNOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACCposition to operate the radio.SEEK ButtonsPress and release the SEEK buttons to search for the nextchannel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seekup and the left switch to seek down. The radio willremain tuned to the new channel until you make anotherselection. Holding either button will bypass channelswithout stopping until you release it.SCAN ButtonPressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search forthe next channel, pausing for eight seconds before con-tinuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCANbutton a second time.INFO Button — Except REU RadioPressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa-tion between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if avail-able). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for anadditional three seconds will make the radio display theSong Title all of the time (press and hold again to returnto normal display).UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 1974
INFO Button — REU RadioPressing the INFO button will display information aboutArtist, Song Title, and Composer (if available). Pressingthe INFO button again will close the INFO screen.RW/FFPressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttonscauses the tuner to search for the next channel in thedirection of the arrows.TUNE Control (Rotary)Turn the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob clockwise toincrease or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.MUSIC TYPE Button — Except REU RadioPressing this button once will turn on the Music Typemode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE buttonor turning the Tune/Scroll control knob within fiveseconds will allow the program format type to be se-lected.Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the musictype.By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Typefunction is active, the radio will be tuned to the nextchannel with the same selected Music Type name.If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will beexited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.MUSIC TYPE Button — REU RadioPressing this button provides a MUSIC TYPES list fromwhich you can make a selection. Once a selection ismade, you can seek up, or down, or scan the channelsand the radio will tune to the next station matching theselected format. There is no time-out for this screen.Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button again will close theMUSIC TYPE screen. Once closed, seek up, seek down,and scan will no longer be based on your selection.198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SETUP ButtonPressing the SETUP button allows you to select thefollowing items:•Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. Thisnumber is used to activate, deactivate, or change theSirius subscription.SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton MemoryWhen you are receiving a channel that you wish tocommit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channeland press and release that button. If a button is notselected within five seconds after pressing the SET but-ton, the channel will continue to play but will not bestored into pushbutton memory.You may add a second channel to each pushbutton byrepeating the above procedure with this exception: Pressthe SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the displaywindow. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. Thisallows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored intopushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2memory can be selected by pressing the pushbuttontwice.Every time a preset button is used, a correspondingbutton number will display.Buttons1-6These buttons tune the radio to the channels that youcommit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).Operating Instructions - Hands-Free Phone (IfEquipped)Refer to “Hands-Free Communication (UConnectt)” inSection 3.UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 1994
KICKERTHIGH PERFORMANCE SOUND SYSTEMWITH DRIVER-SELECTABLE SURROUND (DSS) –IF EQUIPPEDYour vehicle is equipped with a state of the art audioamplifier that provides 5.1-channel surround sound fromany stereo audio source. A new feature of the Kickertaudio system offers the ability to choose surround soundfor any audio source.“Audio Surround” is optimized for front seat passengersfor any audio source. This surround effect is available foraudio from any source – AM/FM/CD/ Satellite Radio orAUX – and is activated through the Electronic VehicleInformation Center (EVIC). Refer to “Driver-SelectableSurround Sound (DSS)” under “Electronic Vehicle Infor-mation Center (EVIC)” in Section 4.DSS modes for audio sources are “Stereo” and “AudioSurround,” which is surround sound equalized for thefront seat occupants. The “Video Surround” mode isdescribed under “KickertMobile Surround (KMS1).t”Please note that DSS effects are dependent on the mix ofthe original recording. Some audio will sound better inDSS modes, others in Stereo mode.When in “Audio Surround” mode, balance is set auto-matically. Fader control is available to add more sur-round audio if desired.200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLSThe remote sound system controls are located on thesurface of the steering wheel at the 3 and 9 o’clockpositions.Vehicles equipped with steering wheel-mounted buttonsare also equipped with the Electronic Vehicle InformationCenter (EVIC). The EVIC features a driver-interactivedisplay. This is located in the instrument cluster belowthe speedometer.VOLUME ButtonThe VOLUME button controls the sound levelof the sound system. Press the top of theVOLUME button to increase the sound level.Press the bottom of the VOLUME button todecrease the sound level.AUDIO MODE ButtonPress the AUDIO MODE button to select theCompass/Temp/Audio screen. This screendisplays radio and media mode informationdepending on which radio is in the vehicle.If the Compass/Temp/Audio screen is already displayedwhen the AUDIO MODE button is pressed, then themode will change (i.e., from AM to FM, to Media mode,etc., depending on which radio is in the vehicle).FUNCTION SELECT ButtonWhen the EVIC is in the Compass/Temp/Audio screen, press the FUNCTION SELECTbutton to operate various radio, media, andUniversal Customer Interface (UCI) functions(i.e., advance presets, select next folder, jump to or startplaying songs in playlists, etc., depending on which radiois in the vehicle and if equipped with UCI).UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 2014
SCROLL ButtonWhen the EVIC is in the Compass/Temp/Audio screen, press the SCROLL button to seekup and down radio stations, tracks, chapters,files, etc., depending on which radio is in thevehicle.CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCETo keep the CD/DVD discs in good condition, take thefollowing precautions:1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching thesurface.2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,wiping from center to edge.3. Do not apply paper, paper CD labels, or tape to thedisc; avoid scratching the disc.4. Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, cleaners,or antistatic sprays.5. Store the disc in its case after playing.6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may becometoo high.RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONESUnder certain conditions, the cellular phone being on inyour vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance fromyour radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminatedby relocating the cellular phone antenna. This conditionis not harmful to the radio. If your radio performancedoes not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of theantenna, it is recommended that the radio volume beturned down or off during cellular phone operation.202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CLIMATE CONTROLSManual Air Conditioning and Heating SystemThe Manual Temperature Control consists of a series ofouter rotary dials and inner pushbuttons.Blower ControlUse this control to regulate theamount of air forced through the ven-tilation system in any mode. Theblower speed increases as you movethe control to the right from the “O”(Off) position. There are four blowerspeeds.NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, theclimate controls will not function during Remote Startoperation if the blower control is left in the “O” (Off)position.UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 2034
Temperature ControlUse this control to regulate the tem-perature of the air inside the passengercompartment. The blue area of thescale indicates cooler temperatureswhile the red area indicates warmertemperatures.NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seemslower than expected, check the front of the A/C con-denser (located in front of the radiator) for an accumu-lation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water sprayfrom behind the radiator and through the condenser.Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to thecondenser, reducing air conditioning performance.Mode ControlUse this control to choose from severalpatterns of air distribution. You canselect either a primary mode as iden-tified by the symbols on the control, ora blend of two of these modes.•PanelAir is directed through the outlets in the instru-ment panel and the center console. These outletscan be adjusted to direct airflow.NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can beaimed so that they are directed toward the rear seatpassengers for maximum airflow to the rear.•Bi-LevelAir is directed through the instrument panel,center console and floor outlets.204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: For all settings except full cold or full hot, thereis a difference in temperature between the upper andlower outlets. The warmer air flows to the floor outlets.This feature gives improved comfort during sunny butcool conditions.•FloorAir is directed through the floor outlets with asmall amount flowing through the defrost andside window demist outlets.•Mix Air is directed through the floor, defrost, andside window demist outlets. This setting worksbest in cold or snowy conditions that requireextra heat to the windshield. This setting is good formaintaining comfort while reducing moisture on thewindshield.•DefrostAir is directed through the windshield and sidewindow demist outlets. Use this mode withmaximum blower and temperature settings for bestwindshield and side window defrosting.NOTE:The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix,Defrost, and Floor or a blend of these modes, even if theAirConditioning Snowflake button is not pressed. This dehu-midifies the air to help dry the windshield. To improve fueleconomy, use these modes only when necessary.•Recirculation ControlUse this button to block the flow of outsideair from coming into the passenger compart-ment. A light will illuminate when the sys-tem is in recirculation mode. Use the recir-culation mode to provide maximumA/C performancein hot ambient conditions, or to block outside odors,dust, etc.UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 2054
NOTE:•Continuous use of the recirculation mode may makethe inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.Extended use of this mode is not recommended.•The use of the recirculation mode in cold or dampweather may cause windows to fog on the inside,because of moisture build-up inside the vehicle. Selectthe Outside Air position for maximum defogging.•TheA/C will engage automatically to prevent foggingwhen the recirculation button is pressed.•The A/C can be deselected manually without disturb-ing the mode control selection.Air Conditioning ControlUse this button to engage the Air Conditioning. Alight will illuminate when the Air ConditioningSystem is engagedNOTE: The air conditioning compressor will not engageuntil the engine has been running for a few seconds.•MAX A/CFor maximum cooling use the A/C and recirculationbuttons at the same time.•Economy ModeIf economy mode is desired, press the A/C button to turnoff the indicator light and the A/C compressor. Then,move the temperature control to the desired temperature.Operating TipsNOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section forsuggested control settings for various weather condi-tions.206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Summer OperationThe engine cooling system in air-conditioned vehiclesmust be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolantto provide proper corrosion protection and to protectagainst engine overheating. A 50% solution of ethyleneglycol antifreeze coolant in water is recommended. Referto “Maintenance Procedures” in Section 7 of this manualfor proper coolant selection.Winter OperationUse of the air Recirculation mode during winter monthsis not recommended because it may cause windowfogging.Vacation StorageAnytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the airconditioning system at idle for about five minutes in thefresh air and high blower settings. This will ensureadequate system lubrication to minimize the possibilityof compressor damage when the system is started again.Window FoggingInterior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re-moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost. TheDefrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clearwindshield and provide sufficient heating. If side win-dow fogging becomes a problem, increase blower speed.Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild butrainy or humid weather.NOTE: Recirculation without A/C should not be usedfor long periods as fogging may occur.Side Window DemistersA side window demister outlet is located at each end ofthe instrument panel. These non-adjustable outlets directair toward the side windows when the system is in theFloor, Mix, or Defrost mode. The air is directed at the areaof the windows through which you view the outsidemirrors.UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 2074
Outside Air IntakeMake sure the air intake, located directly in front of thewindshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leavescollected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if theyenter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. Inwinter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,slush, and snow.A/C Air Filter — If EquippedThe A/C Air Filter will reduce, but not eliminate, dieseland agricultural smells. The filter acts on air coming fromoutside the vehicle and recirculated air within the pas-senger compartment. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures”in Section 7 of this manual for A/C Air Filter serviceinformation or see your authorized dealer for service.Refer to the “Maintenance Schedules” in Section 8 of thismanual for filter service intervals.208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather ConditionsUNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 2094
STARTING AND OPERATINGCONTENTSmStarting Procedures .....................214▫Automatic Transmission ................215▫Keyless Go ..........................216▫Normal Starting ......................217▫Extremely Cold Weather(Below 220°F Or 229°C) ................217▫If Engine Fails To Start .................218▫After Starting ........................219mEngine Block Heater — If Equipped .........219mAutomatic Transmission ..................220▫General Information ...................220▫Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .222▫5-Speed Automatic Transmission ..........223mAutoStickt...........................228▫AutoSticktOperation ..................228▫AutoSticktGeneral Information ...........229mDriving On Slippery Surfaces ..............229▫Acceleration .........................2295
▫Traction ............................230mDriving Through Water ..................230▫Flowing/Rising Water ..................230mParking Brake .........................232mBrake System ..........................234▫Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ............235mPower Steering ........................237mElectronic Brake Control System ............238▫ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) ............238▫TCS (Traction Control System) ............239▫BAS (Brake Assist System) ...............239▫ESP (Electronic Stability Program) .........240▫Synchronizing ESP ....................244▫ESP/BAS Malfunction Indicator Light AndESP/TCS Indicator Light ................244mTire Safety Information ...................245▫Tire Markings ........................245▫Tire Loading And Tire Pressure ...........250mTires — General Information ...............254▫Tire Pressure .........................254▫Tire Inflation Pressures .................255▫Radial Ply Tires ......................257▫Tire Spinning ........................258▫Tread Wear Indicators ..................258▫Life Of Tire .........................259▫Replacement Tires .....................260▫Alignment And Balance .................261212 STARTING AND OPERATING
mTire Chains ...........................261mSnow Tires ...........................262mTire Rotation Recommendations ............262▫Tire Rotation — Standard Tires ............263▫Tire Rotation — Optional Tires ............263mTire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ........264▫Premium System ......................266▫General Information ...................269mFuel Requirements ......................270▫6.1L Engine .........................270▫Reformulated Gasoline .................270▫Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ..............271▫MMT In Gasoline .....................271▫Materials Added To Fuel ................272▫Fuel System Cautions ..................272▫Carbon Monoxide Warnings ..............273mAdding Fuel ..........................274▫Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ...............274▫Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ............275mVehicle Loading ........................276▫Vehicle Certification Label ...............276▫Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) .......276▫Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) .........276▫Overloading .........................277▫Loading ............................277mTrailer Towing .........................278mRecreational Towing (Behind Motorhome, Etc.) . .278STARTING AND OPERATING 2135
STARTING PROCEDURESBefore starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust theinside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and ifpresent, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seatbelts.WARNING!•Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leavingunattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for anumber of reasons. A child or others could beseriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the key inthe ignition. A child could operate power win-dows, other controls, or move the vehicle.•Do not leave animals or children inside parkedvehicles in hot weather; interior heat buildup maycause serious injury or death.•Be sure to turn OFF the engine and remove the keyfrom the ignition switch if you want to rest orsleep in your car. Accidents can be caused byinadvertently moving the shift lever. Accidentscan also be caused by pressing the acceleratorpedal. This may cause excessive heat in the ex-haust system, resulting in overheating and vehiclefire, which may cause serious or fatal injuries.214 STARTING AND OPERATING
Automatic TransmissionThe shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARKposition before you can start the engine.Apply the brakesbefore shifting into any driving gear.CAUTION!Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-ing precautions are not observed:•Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come toa complete stop.•Shift into or out of REVERSE only after thevehicle has come to a complete stop and the engineis at idle speed.•Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRALinto any forward gear when the engine is aboveidle speed.•Before shifting into any gear, make sure your footis firmly on the brake pedal.STARTING AND OPERATING 2155
Keyless GoThis function allows the driver tooperate the ignition switch withthe push of a button, as long as theENGINE START/STOP button isinstalled and the Keyless Go igni-tion key (FOBIK) is in the passen-ger compartment.Installing And Removing The Engine Start/StopButton1. Remove the ignition key (FOBIK).2. Insert the ENGINE START/STOP button into theignition switch.NOTE: The ENGINE START/STOP button can be re-moved from the ignition switch (WIN) for regular igni-tion key (FOBIK) use.Keyless Go Functions — With Driver’s Foot Off TheBrake Pedal (In PARK Position)•Press the ENGINE START/STOP button once to acti-vate the radio, wipers, and windows.•Press the ENGINE START/STOP button twice toactivate the heating/air conditioning (HVAC) controls,and the instrument cluster.•Press the ENGINE START/STOP button three times toturn off the ignition switch.Keyless Go Functions - With Driver’s Foot On TheBrake Pedal (PARK or NEUTRAL Gear Position Only)•Press the ENGINE START/STOP button once to oper-ate all of the accessories.•Press the ENGINE START/STOP button twice to startthe engine.216 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: 1. Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. 2. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. 3. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. 4. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.NOTICE: This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du CanadaNOTICE: Changes or modifications made to this equipment not expressly approved by (manufacturer name) may void the FCC authorization to operate this equipment.
Normal StartingUsing The ENGINE START/STOP Button (Tip Start)NOTE: Normal Starting of either a cold or a warmengine is obtained without pumping or depressing theaccelerator pedal.Press and hold your foot on the brake pedal and then pressand release the ENGINE START/STOP button twice. Thestarter motor will engage and continue to run, and it willdisengage automatically when the engine is running. If theengine fails to start, the starter will disengage automati-cally in 10 seconds. If this occurs, wait 10 to 15 seconds,then repeat the normal starting procedure.To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINESTART/STOP Button1. Press and hold your foot on the brake pedal.2. Place the shift lever in PARK, then press and releasethe ENGINE START/STOP button.Using Fob With Integrated Key (Tip Start)NOTE: Normal Starting of either a cold or a warmengine is obtained without pumping or depressing theaccelerator pedal.Do not press the accelerator. Use the Fob with IntegratedKey to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START positionand release it as soon as the starter engages. The startermotor will continue to run, and it will disengage automati-cally when the engine is running. If the engine fails to start,the starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. If thisoccurs, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position, wait10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the normal starting procedure.Extremely Cold Weather (Below 220°F or 229°C)To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use ofan externally powered electric engine block heater (avail-able from your authorized dealer) is recommended.STARTING AND OPERATING 2175
If Engine Fails To StartWARNING!•Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids intothe throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt tostart the vehicle. This could result in a flash firecausing serious personal injury.•Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get itstarted. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuelcould enter the catalytic converter and once theengine has started, ignite and damage the converterand vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery,booster cables may be used to obtain a start from abooster battery or the battery in another vehicle.This type of start can be dangerous if done improp-erly. Refer to Section 6 for proper jump-startingprocedures and follow them carefully.Clearing A Flooded Engine - Using ENGINESTART/STOP ButtonIf the engine fails to start after you have followed the“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather9proce-dures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, pressand hold the brake pedal with your left foot, push andhold the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor withyour right foot, and then press and release the ENGINESTART/STOP button twice. The starter motor will en-gage automatically, run for 10 seconds, and then disen-gage. Once this occurs, release the accelerator pedal andthe brake pedal, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat thenormal starting procedure.Clearing A Flooded Engine - Using Fob With IntegratedKeyIf the engine fails to start after you have followed the“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” proce-dures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, pushthe accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.218 STARTING AND OPERATING
Then, turn the ignition switch to the START position andrelease it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motorwill disengage automatically in 10 seconds. Once thisoccurs, release the accelerator pedal, turn the ignitionswitch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, thenrepeat the normal starting procedure.CAUTION!To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to 15seconds before trying again.After StartingThe idle speed is controlled automatically and it willdecrease as the engine warms up.ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPEDThe engine block heater warms engine coolant andpermits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cordto a standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with agrounded, three-wire extension cord.The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood onthe driver side of the vehicle. It has a removable cap thatis located on the driver side of the Integrated PowerModule.WARNING!Remember to disconnect the cord before driving.Damage to the 110-115 Volt electrical cord could causeelectrocution.STARTING AND OPERATING 2195
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONCAUTION!Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-ing precautions are not observed:•Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come toa complete stop.•Shift into or out of REVERSE only after thevehicle has come to a complete stop and the engineis at idle speed.•Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRALinto any forward gear when the engine is aboveidle speed.•Before shifting into any gear, make sure your footis firmly on the brake pedal.WARNING!It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK orNEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idlespeed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal,the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or inreverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hitsomeone or something. Only shift into gear when theengine is idling normally and when your right foot isfirmly on the brake pedal.General InformationThe automatic transmission selects individual gears au-tomatically, dependent upon:•Altitude•Vehicle loading•Driving style220 STARTING AND OPERATING
•Shift lever position•Accelerator position•Vehicle speedThe gear shifting process is continuously adapted, de-pendent on the driving style, the driving situation, andthe road characteristics.NOTE:•After selecting any driving position, wait a moment toallow the gear to engage fully before accelerating,especially when the engine is cold.•If there is a need to restart the engine, be sure to cyclethe key to the LOCK position before restarting. Trans-mission engagement may be delayed up to 10 secondsafter restart if the key is not cycled to the LOCKposition first.•The electronically-controlled transmission provides aprecise shift schedule. The transmission electronics areself-calibrating. Therefore, the first few shifts on a newvehicle may be somewhat abrupt or soft until after thebreak-in period. This is a normal condition, and pre-cision shifts will develop within a few shift cycles.The shift lever is automatically locked while in the PARKposition. To move the shift lever out of the PARKposition, the brake pedal must be firmly depressed beforethe shift lock will release.Move the shift lever to the desired position only when theengine is idling normally and the brake pedal is applied.Do not release the brake pedal until ready to drive. Thevehicle may otherwise accelerate quickly when the shiftlever is in DRIVE or REVERSE position.STARTING AND OPERATING 2215
WARNING!Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure thosein and near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, youshould never exit a vehicle while the engine is run-ning. Before exiting a vehicle, you should always shiftthe transmission into PARK, remove the key from theignition, and apply the parking brake. Once the key isremoved from the ignition, the transmission shift leveris locked in the PARK position, securing the vehicleagainst unwanted movement. Furthermore, you shouldnever leave unattended children inside a vehicle.Over-Temperature ModeThe transmission electronics constantly monitor the trans-mission oil temperature. If the transmission exceeds nor-mal operating temperature, the transmission will changethe way it shifts to help control the condition. This mayresult in a slightly different feeling or response duringnormal operation in DRIVE position. After the transmis-sion cools down, it will return to normal operation.Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock SystemThis vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission ShiftInterlock (BTSI) system that holds the shift lever in thePARK position when the ignition switch is in the LOCKposition. To move the shift lever out of the PARKposition, the ignition switch must be turned to the ONposition, and the brake pedal must be depressed.BTSI OverrideThere is an override for the BTSI that allows you to movethe shift lever out of the PARK position if an electricalsystem malfunction occurs (i.e., dead battery). To accessthe override (using a flat-bladed screwdriver), carefullyremove the override cover which is located on the rightof the shift lever gate.222 STARTING AND OPERATING
To activate the override, first insert the key into theignition switch and turn it to the ACC or ON position.Then, press the pink-colored tab through the access portwith a small flat-bladed screwdriver or alike. Whilepressing the override tab, move the shift lever out of thePARK position. When complete, return the overridecover to its original position.5-Speed Automatic TransmissionShifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should bedone only after the accelerator pedal is released and thevehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brakepedal when moving the shift lever between these gears.Brake Interlock OverrideShift LeverSTARTING AND OPERATING 2235
Gear RangesPARKPARK supplements the parking brake by locking thetransmission. The engine can be started in this range.Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Applythe parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range.When parking on a flat surface, place the shift lever in thePARK position first, and then apply the parking brake.When parking on a hill, it is important to set the parkingbrake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwisethe load on the transmission locking mechanism maymake it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. Asan added precaution, turn the front wheels toward thecurb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on anuphill grade.WARNING!Never use PARK position on an automatic transmis-sion as a substitute for the parking brake. Alwaysapply the parking brake fully when parked to guardagainst vehicle movement and possible injury ordamage.The following indicators should be used to ensure thatyou have engaged the shift lever in the PARK position:•When shifting into PARK, move the shift lever all theway forward and to the left until it stops and is fullyseated.•Look at the shift indicator display on the instrumentpanel to ensure it is in the P position.224 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!Damage to the shifter could result if the shift lever ismoved out of PARK before the ignition is turnedfrom the LOCK to ON position.REVERSEShift into REVERSE gear only when the vehicle is com-pletely stopped.NEUTRALIn NEUTRAL, no power is transmitted from the engine tothe drive axle. When the brakes are released, the vehiclecan be moved freely (pushed or towed). Do not engageNEUTRAL position while driving except to coast whenthe vehicle is in danger of skidding (e.g., on icy roads).The engine may be started in this range. Use this rangefor starting your vehicle if it is moving or being towed.CAUTION!Coasting the vehicle or driving for any other reasonwith the shift lever in NEUTRAL can result intransmission damage.WARNING!Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off theignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafepractices that limit your response to changing trafficor road conditions. You might lose control of thevehicle and have an accident.STARTING AND OPERATING 2255
DRIVEThis range should be used for most city and highwaydriving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down-shifts and the best fuel economy.The transmission automatically upshifts through 5thgear. The DRIVE position provides optimum drivingcharacteristics under all normal operating conditions.When frequent transmission shifting occurs when usingthe Overdrive range, such as when operating the vehicleunder heavy loading conditions (in hilly terrain, travel-ing into strong head winds, or while towing heavytrailers, use the AutoSticktmode and select the “3”range.Delayed Shifts in Cold TemperaturesDuring cold temperature operation, you may noticedelayed upshifts depending on engine and transmissiontemperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature im-proves warm up time of the engine and transmission toachieve maximum efficiency.Temporary Transmission Limp Home ModeThe transmission is monitored for abnormal conditions.If a condition is detected that could result in transmissiondamage, the transmission will engage Limp Home Mode.If vehicle acceleration worsens or the transmission nolonger shifts, the transmission is most likely operating inthe Limp Home Mode. In this mode, the transmissionwill remain in the current gear until the vehicle isbrought to a stop. After the vehicle has stopped, PARK,REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate. Sec-ond gear will operate in the DRIVE position. The Mal-function Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated.226 STARTING AND OPERATING
A reset feature is available to allow the vehicle to bedriven to an authorized dealer for service. To reset thetransmission, use the following procedure:1. Stop the vehicle.2. Move the shift lever to the PARK position.3. Turn OFF the engine.4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.5. Restart the engine.6. Move the shift lever to the desired range. If theproblem is no longer detected, the transmission willreturn to normal operation.NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-mend that you visit your authorized dealer at yourearliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer hasdiagnostic equipment to determine if the problem couldrecur.Have the transmission checked at your authorized dealeras soon as possible.If the problem has been momentary, the transmission canbe reset to regain all forward gears.Permanent Transmission Limp Home ModePermanent Limp Home Mode will be activated if thetransmission enters temporary Limp Home Mode threetimes. Follow the reset procedure described under “Tem-porary Transmission Limp Home Mode” in this section.In Permanent Limp Home Mode, PARK, REVERSE, andNEUTRAL will continue to operate. Second gear willoperate in the DRIVE position. The Malfunction IndicatorLight (MIL) may illuminate.STARTING AND OPERATING 2275
AUTOSTICKTAutosticktis a driver-interactive transmission that offersmanual gear shifting to provide you with more control ofthe vehicle. Autosticktallows you to maximize enginebraking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,and improve overall vehicle performance. This systemcan also provide you with more control during passing,city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving,trailer towing, and many other situations.AutostickTOperationBy placing the shift lever in the DRIVE position, it can bemoved from side to side. This allows the driver to selecta higher or lower range of gears. Moving the shift lever tothe left (-) triggers a downshift and to the right (+) anupshift. The gear position will display in the instrumentcluster on the transmission range indicator.NOTE:•In Autosticktmode, the transmission will only shiftup and down when the driver manually moves theshift lever right (D+) or left (D-).•An UPSHIFT message will appear in the ElectronicVehicle Information Center (EVIC) portion of the in-strument cluster when usingAutostickt. This messageappears in order to alert the driver to upshift to thenext gear. The UPSHIFT message will display whileoperating the vehicle at higher engine revolutions perminute (RPM).You can shift in or out of the Autosticktmode at any timewithout taking your foot off the accelerator pedal. Whenyou wish to engageAutostickt, simply move the shift leverto the right (D+) or left (D-) while in the DRIVE position.The transmission will remain in the current gear until anupshift or downshift is chosen. When you wish to disen-gage Autostickt, hold the shift lever to the right for at least228 STARTING AND OPERATING
one second. The transmission will now operate automati-cally, shifting between the five available gears.AutostickTGeneral Information•You can start out in 1st or 2nd gear. The system willignore attempts to upshift at too low of a vehicle speed.•The transmission will automatically downshift to 1stgear when coming to a stop.•Starting out in 2nd gear is helpful in snowy or icyconditions.•Avoid using speed control when Autosticktis en-gaged.•The transmission will not automatically shift up whenmaximum engine speed is reached whileAutosticktisengaged.•Transmission shifting will be more noticeable whenAutosticktis engaged.DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACESAccelerationRapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip-pery surfaces may cause the rear wheels to pull errati-cally to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs whenthere is a difference in the surface traction under the rear(driving) wheels.WARNING!Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rearwheels. You could lose control of the vehicle andpossibly have an accident. Accelerate slowly andcarefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction(ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.).STARTING AND OPERATING 2295
TractionWhen driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for awedge of water to build up between the tire and roadsurface. This is known as hydroplaning and may causepartial or complete loss of vehicle control and stoppingability. To reduce this possibility, the following precau-tions should be observed:1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads areslushy.2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first becomevisible.4. Keep tires properly inflated.5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle andthe vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a suddenstop.DRIVING THROUGH WATERDriving through water more than a few inches/centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensuresafety and prevent damage to your vehicle.Flowing/Rising WaterWARNING!Do not drive on, or cross, a road or a path wherewater is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off).Flowing water can wear away the road or path’ssurface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeperwater. Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water cancarry your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow thiswarning may result in injuries that are serious orfatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.230 STARTING AND OPERATING
Shallow Standing WaterAlthough your vehicle is capable of driving throughshallow standing water, consider the following Cautionand Warning before doing so.CAUTION!•Always check the depth of the standing waterbefore driving through it. Never drive throughstanding water that is deeper than the bottom ofthe tire rims mounted on the vehicle.•Determine the condition of the road or the paththat is under water, and if there are any obstaclesin the way, before driving through the standingwater.•Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when drivingthrough standing water. This will minimize waveeffects.CAUTION!•Driving through standing water may cause dam-age to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Al-ways inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil,transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination(i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance)after driving through standing water. Do not con-tinue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appearscontaminated, as this may result in further dam-age. Such damage is not covered by the NewVehicle Limited Warranty.•Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine cancause it to lock up and stall out, and cause seriousinternal damage to the engine. Such damage is notcovered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.STARTING AND OPERATING 2315
WARNING!•Driving through standing water limits your vehi-cle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph (8km/h) when driving through standing water.•Driving through standing water limits your vehi-cle’s braking capabilities, which increases stop-ping distances. Therefore, after driving throughstanding water, drive slowly and lightly press onthe brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.•Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine cancause it to lock up and stall out, and leave youstranded.•Failure to follow these warnings may result ininjuries that are serious or fatal to you, yourpassengers, and others around you.PARKING BRAKEThe parking brake should always be applied when thedriver is not in the vehicle.WARNING!Never use PARK position on an automatic transmis-sion as a substitute for the parking brake. Alwaysapply the parking brake fully when parked to guardagainst vehicle movement and possible injury ordamage.When parking on a flat surface, place the shift lever in thePARK position first and then apply the parking brake.232 STARTING AND OPERATING
When parking on a hill, it is important to apply theparking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK,otherwise the load on the transmission locking mecha-nism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out ofPARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheelstoward the curb on a downhill grade and away from thecurb on an uphill grade.The foot operated parking brake is positioned below thelower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply theparking brake, push the parking brake pedal down andthen remove your foot from the pedal. To release theparking brake, push down on the parking brake pedaland then release. The brake light in the instrument cluster will turn onwhen the parking brake is applied and the ignitionswitch is ON.NOTE: This light only shows that the parking brake isapplied. It does not show the degree of brake application.Parking BrakeSTARTING AND OPERATING 2335
WARNING!•Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leavingunattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for anumber of reasons. A child or others could beseriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the key inthe ignition. A child could operate power win-dows, other controls, or move the vehicle.•Be sure the parking brake is fully disengagedbefore driving; failure to do so can lead to brakefailure and an accident.BRAKE SYSTEMYour vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulicbrake systems. If either of the two hydraulicsystems loses normal capability, the remainingsystem will still function. There will be someloss of overall braking effectiveness. This may be evidentby increased pedal travel during application, greaterpedal force required to slow or stop, and potentialactivation of the Brake Warning Light.In the event power assist is lost for any reason (forexample, repeated brake applications with the engineOFF) the brakes will still function. The effort required tobrake the vehicle will be much greater than that requiredwith the power system operating.234 STARTING AND OPERATING
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increasedvehicle stability and brake performance under mostbraking conditions. The system automatically “pumps”the brakes during severe braking conditions to preventwheel lock-up.The Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) preventsthe rear wheels from over-braking and provides greatercontrol of available braking forces applied to the rearaxle.When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), youmay also hear a slight clicking sound as well as somerelated motor noises. These noises are the system per-forming its self check cycle to ensure that theABS systemis working properly. This self check occurs each time thevehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h).ABS is activated during braking under certain road orstopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can in-clude ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loosedebris, or panic stops.You also may experience the following when the brakesystem goes into Anti-Lock:•The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for ashort time after the stop),•The clicking sound of solenoid valves,•Brake pedal pulsations, and•Aslight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the endof the stop.These are all normal characteristics of ABS.STARTING AND OPERATING 2355
WARNING!•The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) contains sophisticated elec-tronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference caused byimproperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment.This interference can cause possible loss of anti-lock brakingcapability. Installation of such equipment should be performed byqualified professionals.•Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their effectivenessand may lead to an accident. Pumping makes the stopping distancelonger. Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need toslow down or stop.•The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent the naturallaws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increasebraking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condi-tion of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded.•The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent accidents,including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, followinganother vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive,and skillful driver can prevent accidents.•The capabilities of an Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) equippedvehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner,that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size andtype and tires must be properly inflated to produceaccurate signals for the computer.Anti-Lock Brake LightTheAnti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Light monitorsthe Anti-Lock Brake System. The light will comeon when the ignition switch is turned to the ON positionand may stay on for as long as four seconds.If the ABS Light remains on or comes on while driving, itindicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake systemis not functioning and that service is required. However,the conventional brake system will continue to operatenormally if the Brake Warning Light is not on.If the ABS Light is on, the brake system should beserviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits ofAnti-Lock brakes. If the ABS Light does not come onwhen the ignition switch is turned to the ON position,have the bulb repaired as soon as possible.236 STARTING AND OPERATING
If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Lightremain on, theABS and EBD systems are not functioning.Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.POWER STEERINGThe standard power steering system will give you goodvehicle response and increased ease of maneuverabilityin tight spaces. The system will provide mechanicalsteering capability if power assist is lost.If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it willstill be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-tions, you will observe a substantial increase in steeringeffort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and duringparking maneuvers.NOTE: Increased noise levels at the end of the steeringwheel travel are considered normal and do not indicatethat there is a problem with the power steering system.Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steeringpump may make noise for a short amount of time. This isdue to the cold, thick fluid in the steering system. Thisnoise should be considered normal, and it does not in anyway damage the steering system.WARNING!Continued operation with reduced power steeringassist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.Service should be obtained as soon as possible.CAUTION!Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end ofthe steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluidtemperature and it should be avoided when possible.Damage to the power steering pump may occur.STARTING AND OPERATING 2375
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEMYour vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronicbrake control system commonly referred to as ESP. Thissystem includes the ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System), theTCS (Traction Control System), the BAS (Brake AssistSystem), and the ESP (Electronic Stability Program).These systems work together to enhance both vehiclestability and control in various driving conditions.ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System)This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle controlunder adverse braking conditions by controlling hydrau-lic brake pressure. This prevents wheel lock-up to helpavoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking. Formore information about ABS, refer to “Anti-Lock BrakeSystem” in Section 5.WARNING!The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physicsfrom acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase thetraction afforded by prevailing road conditions. TheABS cannot prevent accidents, including those re-sulting from excessive speed in turns, driving onvery slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a safe,attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle mustnever be exploited in a reckless or dangerous mannerthat could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety ofothers.238 STARTING AND OPERATING
TCS (Traction Control System)This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of eachdriven wheel. If wheel spin is detected, brake pressure isapplied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine power isreduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability.BAS (Brake Assist System)This system complements the ABS by optimizing thevehicle braking capability during emergency brakingmaneuvers. This system detects an emergency brakingsituation by sensing the rate and amount of brake appli-cation and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes.This can help reduce braking distances.Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BASassistance. To receive the benefits of this system, youmust apply continuous brake pedal pressure during thestopping sequence. Do not reduce brake pedal pressureunless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedalis released, the BAS is deactivated.WARNING!The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physicsfrom acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase thetraction afforded by prevailing road conditions. TheBAS cannot prevent accidents, including those re-sulting from excessive speed in turns, driving onvery slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a safe,attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle mustnever be exploited in a reckless or dangerous mannerthat could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety ofothers.STARTING AND OPERATING 2395
ESP (Electronic Stability Program)This system enhances directional control and stability ofthe vehicle under various driving conditions. The ESPcorrects for oversteering and understeering the vehicleby applying the brake of the appropriate wheel. Enginepower may also be reduced to assist in counteracting thecondition of oversteer or understeer and help the vehiclemaintain the desired path.The ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the paththat the driver intends to steer the vehicle and comparesit to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual pathdoes not match the intended path, the ESP applies thebrake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteractingthe condition of oversteer or understeer.•Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more thanappropriate for the steering wheel position.•Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less thanappropriate for the steering wheel position.The ESP/TCS Indicator Light located in theinstrument cluster, starts to flash as soon as thetires lose traction and the ESP system becomesactive. The ESP/TCS Indicator Light alsoflashes when TCS is active. If the ESP/TCS IndicatorLight begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on theaccelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sureto adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing roadconditions.240 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!The ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of physicsfrom acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase thetraction afforded by prevailing road conditions. TheESP cannot prevent accidents, including those result-ing from excessive speed in turns, driving on veryslippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, at-tentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. Thecapabilities of an ESP-equipped vehicle must neverbe exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner thatcould jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety ofothers.The ESP system has three available operating modes:ESP OnThis is the normal operating mode for the ESP. Wheneverthe vehicle is started, the ESP system will be in this mode.This mode should be used for most driving situations.The ESP should only be turned OFF for specific reasonsas noted in the following paragraphs.Partial OffThe “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when amore spirited driving experience is desired. It is alsointended for driving in deep snow, sand, or gravel. Thismode disables the TCS portion of the ESP and raises thethreshold for ESP activation, which allows for morewheel spin than what ESP normally allows.STARTING AND OPERATING 2415
The ESP OFF switch is located in the switch bank near thebottom center of the instrument panel. To enter the “Par-tial Off” mode, momentarily depress the ESP OFF switchand the ESP/TCS Indicator Light will illuminate. To turnthe ESP ON again, momentarily depress the ESP OFFswitch and the ESP/TCS Indicator Light will turn off.NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when drivingwith snow chains, or when starting off in deep snow,sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the“Partial Off” mode by momentarily depressing the ESPOFF switch. Once the situation requiring “Partial Off”mode is overcome, turn the ESP ON again by momen-tarily depressing the ESP OFF switch. This may be donewhile the vehicle is in motion.Full OffThis mode is intended for off-highway or off-road useonly and should not be used on any public roadways. Inthis mode, all TCS and ESP stability features are turnedOFF. To enter the “Full Off” mode, depress and hold theESP OFF switch for five seconds while the vehicle isstopped with the engine running. After five seconds, achime will sound, the ESP/TCS Indicator Light willilluminate, and the 9ESP OFF9message will display in thevehicle odometer. Press and release the TRIP ODOM-ETER button located on the instrument cluster to clearESP OFF Switch242 STARTING AND OPERATING
this message. The “ESP OFF” message may appear in theElectronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Sec-tion 4. To turn ESP ON again, momentarily depress theESP OFF switch.NOTE: The 9ESP OFF9message will display and theaudible chime will sound when the shift lever is movedinto the PARK position from any position other thanPARK and then moved out of the PARK position. Thiswill occur when the message was previously cleared.WARNING!In the ESP “Full Off” mode, the engine torquereduction and stability features are cancelled. There-fore, the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP isunavailable.NOTE: When the ESP is switched OFF, a feature of thesystem remains active. This feature controls wheel spinacross an axle quite similarly to a limited slip differential.If one wheel on an axle is spinning faster than the other,the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheeland allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheelthat is not spinning. To improve the vehicle’s tractionwhen driving with tire chains, or when starting off indeep snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switchto the “Partial Off” mode by momentarily depressing theESP OFF switch.STARTING AND OPERATING 2435
WARNING!With the ESP switched OFF, the enhanced vehiclestability offered by ESP is unavailable. In an emer-gency evasive maneuver, the ESP system will not en-gage to assist in maintaining stability. The “Full Off”ESP mode is intended for off-highway or off-road only.Synchronizing ESPThe Malfunction Indicator Light for the ESP iscombined with BAS indicator. If the powersupply is interrupted (battery disconnected ordischarged), the ESP/BAS Malfunction Indica-tor Light may illuminate with the engine running. If thisshould occur, turn the steering wheel completely to theleft and then to the right. The ESP/BAS MalfunctionIndicator Light should go out. However, if the lightremains on, have the ESP and BAS checked at yourauthorized dealer as soon as possible.ESP/BAS Malfunction Indicator Light andESP/TCS Indicator LightThe Malfunction Indicator Light for the ESP iscombined with the BAS indicator. The yellowESP/BAS Malfunction Indicator Light and theyellow ESP/TCS Indicator Light in the instru-ment cluster both come on when the ignition switch isturned to the ON position. They should go out with theengine running.The system will turn the ESP/BAS Malfunction IndicatorLight on continuously while the engine is running if itdetects a malfunction in either the ESP or the BAS orboth. If the light remains on after several ignition cyclesand you have driven the vehicle several miles (kilome-ters) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), and theESP is synchronized (refer to Synchronizing ESP), seeyour authorized dealer as soon as possible to have theproblem diagnosed and corrected.244 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:•The ESP/TCS Indicator Light and the ESP/BAS Mal-function Indicator Light will turn on momentarilyeach time the ignition switch is turned ON.•Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESP Systemwill be ON even if it was turned OFF previously.•The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clickingsounds when it is active. This is normal; the soundswill stop when the ESP becomes inactive following themaneuver that caused the ESP activation.TIRE SAFETY INFORMATIONTire Markings1 — U.S. DOT Safety Stan-dards Code (TIN) 4 — Maximum Load2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction andTemperature GradesSTARTING AND OPERATING 2455
NOTE:•P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.•European-Metric tire sizing is based on Europeandesign standards. Tires designed to this standard havethe tire size molded into the sidewall beginning withthe section width. The letter 9P9is absent from this tiresize designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.•LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.design standards. The size designation for LT-Metrictires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for theletters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.•Temporary spare tires are high-pressure compactspares designed for temporary emergency use only.Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T”molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-tion. Example: T145/80D18 103M.•High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. designstandards, and it begins with the tire diameter moldedinto the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.246 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Sizing ChartTIRE SIZING TERMSSize Designation:P= Passenger Car tire size based on U.S. design standards(....blank....(= Passenger Car tire based on European design standardsLT = Light Truck tire based on U.S. design standardsT= Temporary spare tire31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)— Ratio of section height to section width of tire10.5 = Section width in inches (in)R= Construction code—9R9means radial construction—9D9means diagonal or bias construction15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)STARTING AND OPERATING 2475
TIRE SIZING TERMSService Description:95 = Load Index— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carryH= Speed Symbol— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding toits load index under certain operating conditions— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved underspecified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, andposted speed limits)Load Identification:(....blank....(= Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) TireExtra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tireLight Load = Light load tireC, D, E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressureMaximum Load — Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carryMaximum Pressure — Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire248 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Identification Number (TIN)The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires withwhite sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code,located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TINon the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on thevehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then youwill find it on the inboard side of the tire.TIRE IDENTIFICATION NUMBEREXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301DOT = Department of Transportation— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tiresafety standards, and is approved for highway useMA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)—03 means the 3rd week.01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)—01 means the year 2001— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the yearin which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991STARTING AND OPERATING 2495
Tire Loading and Tire PressureTire Placard LocationNOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listedon either the face of the driver’s door or the driver’s sideB-Pillar.Tire and Loading Information PlacardThis placard tells you important information about the:1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle2) total weight your vehicle can carry3) tire size designed for your vehicle4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, andspare tires.Tire Placard LocationTire and Loading Information Placard250 STARTING AND OPERATING
LoadingThe vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceedthe load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. Youwill not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if youadhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tireinflation pressures specified on the Tire and LoadingInformation placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” sectionof this manual.NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rearaxles must not be exceeded. For further information onGAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to“Vehicle Loading” in this section.To determine the maximum loading conditions of yourvehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight ofoccupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXXlbs.” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Thecombined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage andtrailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceedthe weight referenced here.Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-pants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs”on your vehicle’s placard.2. Determine the combined weight of the driver andpassengers that will be riding in your vehicle.3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-sengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.4. The resulting figure equals the available amount ofcargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount ofavailable cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (295kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs [295 kg]).STARTING AND OPERATING 2515
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargobeing loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safelyexceed the available cargo and luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from yourtrailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine how this reduces the availablecargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.NOTE: The following table shows examples on how tocalculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capaci-ties of your vehicle with varying seating configurationsand number and size of occupants. This table is forillustration purposes only and may not be accurate forthe seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.NOTE: For the following example, the combined weightof occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392kg).252 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING AND OPERATING 2535
WARNING!Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloadingcan cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, andincrease your stopping distance. Use tires of therecommended load capacity for your vehicle. Neveroverload them.TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATIONTire PressureProper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe andsatisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primaryareas are affected by improper tire pressure:1. Safety—WARNING!•Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can causeaccidents.•Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in tirefailure.•Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion shock.Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage thatresult in tire failure.•Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. Youcould lose control of your vehicle.•Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect vehiclehandling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of vehiclecontrol.•Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to theother can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left.•Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommendedcold tire inflation pressure.254 STARTING AND OPERATING
2. Economy—Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear pat-terns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal wearpatterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earliertire replacement. Under-inflation also increases tire rollingresistance and results in higher fuel consumption.3. Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability—Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.Tire Inflation PressuresThe proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed either onthe face of the driver’s door or on the driver’s sideB-pillar.Some vehicles may have supplemental tire pressureinformation for vehicle loads that are less than themaximum loaded vehicle condition. These pressure con-ditions will be found in the “Supplemental Tire PressureInformation” section of this manual.The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well asinspected for signs of tire wear or visible damage at leastonce a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge tocheck tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgementwhen determining proper inflation. Radial tires may lookproperly inflated even when they are under-inflated.Tire Placard LocationSTARTING AND OPERATING 2555
CAUTION!After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-ways reinstall the valve stem cap (if equipped). Thiswill prevent moisture and dirt from entering thevalve stem, which could damage the valve stem.Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressureis defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has notbeen driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1mi (1 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire inflationpressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pres-sure molded into the tire sidewall.Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide rangeof outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary withtemperature changes.Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mindwhen checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially inthe winter.Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and theoutside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tireinflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for thisoutside temperature condition.Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressurebuild up or your tire pressure will be too low.256 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Pressures for High Speed OperationThe manufacturer advocates driving at safe speedswithin posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at highspeeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is veryimportant. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicleloading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera-tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tiredealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loadingand cold tire inflation pressures.WARNING!High speed driving with your vehicle under maximumload is dangerous. The added strain on your tires couldcause them to fail. You could have a serious accident.Don’t drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacityat continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).Radial Ply TiresWARNING!Combining radial ply tires with other types of tireson your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handlepoorly. The instability could cause an accident. Al-ways use radial ply tires in sets of four (or six, in caseof trucks with dual rear wheels). Never combinethem with other types of tires.Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only inthe tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult yourauthorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.STARTING AND OPERATING 2575
Tire SpinningWhen stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do notspin your vehicle’s wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h).Refer to the paragraph on “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” inSection 6.WARNING!Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continu-ously when you are stuck, and don’t let anyone neara spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.Tread Wear IndicatorsTread wear indicators are in the original equipment tiresto help you in determining when your tires should bereplaced.1—WornTire2 — New Tire258 STARTING AND OPERATING
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the treadgrooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depthbecomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to thetread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at thispoint.Life Of TireThe service life of a tire is dependent upon varyingfactors including, but not limited to:•Driving style•Tire pressure•Distance drivenWARNING!Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after sixyears, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure tofollow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.You could lose control and have an accident resultingin serious injury or death.Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as littleexposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contactwith oil, grease, and gasoline.STARTING AND OPERATING 2595
Replacement TiresThe tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of manycharacteristics. They should be inspected regularly forwear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu-facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-lent to the originals in size, quality and performancewhen replacement is needed. (Refer to the paragraph on“Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and LoadingInformation” placard for the size designation of your tire.The service description and load identification will befound on the original equipment tire. Failure to useequivalent replacement tires may adversely affect thesafety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommendthat you contact your original equipment or an autho-rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tirespecifications or capability.WARNING!•Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than thatspecified for your vehicle. Some combinations of un-approved tires and wheels may change suspensiondimensions and performance characteristics, resultingin changes to steering, handling, and braking of yourvehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling andstress to steering and suspension components. Youcould lose control and have an accident resulting inserious injury or death. Use only the tire and wheelsizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle.•Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity,other than what was originally equipped on yourvehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index couldresult in tire overloading and failure. You could losecontrol and have an accident.•Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having ad-equate speed capability can result in sudden tire fail-ure and loss of vehicle control.260 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!Replacing original tires with tires of a different sizemay result in false speedometer and odometerreadings.Alignment And BalancePoor suspension alignment may result in:•Fast tire wear.•Uneven tire wear, such as feathering and one-sidedwear.•Vehicle pull to right or left.Tires may also cause the vehicle to pull to the left or right.Alignment will not correct this condition. See yourauthorized dealer for proper diagnosis.Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration.Vibration may be a result of tire and wheel out-of-balance. Proper balancing will reduce vibration andavoid tire cupping and spotty wear.TIRE CHAINSDue to limited clearance, tire chains are not recom-mended.CAUTION!Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains areused.STARTING AND OPERATING 2615
SNOW TIRESSome areas of the country require the use of snow tiresduring the winter. Standard tires are of the all season typeand satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M+Sdesignation on the tire sidewall.If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size andtype to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires onlyin sets of four. Failure to do so may adversely affect thesafety and handling of your vehicle.Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than whatwas originally equipped with your vehicle and shouldnot be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120km/h).TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONSTires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate atdifferent loads and perform different steering, driving,and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear atunequal rates and tend to develop irregular wear pat-terns. These effects can be reduced by timely rotation oftires. The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhilewith aggressive tread designs such as those on all seasontype tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to main-tain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute toa smooth, quiet ride.Follow the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for therecommended tire rotation frequency. Remember, morefrequent rotation is permissible if desired. Also, correctfor anything causing rapid or unusual wear prior toperforming the tire rotation.262 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Rotation — Standard TiresThe suggested rotation method for vehicles equippedwith all season tires is the “forward-cross” as shown inthe following diagram.Tire Rotation — Optional TiresThe suggested rotation method is the “side-to-side” asshown in the following diagram. This method is requireddue to different size tires on the front and rear of thevehicle.STARTING AND OPERATING 2635
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)•The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warnthe driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehiclerecommended cold placard pressure.•The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about1 psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means thatwhen the outside temperature decreases, the tire pres-sure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be setbased on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined asthe tire pressure after the vehicle has not been drivenfor at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mi (1 km)after a three hour period. The cold tire inflationpressure must not exceed the maximum inflationpressure molded into the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires– General Information” in this section for informationon how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tirepressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven - thisis normal and there should be no adjustment for thisincreased pressure.•The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressureif the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warn-ing limit for any reason, including low temperatureeffects and natural pressure loss through the tire.•The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tirepressure as long as the condition exists, and will notturn off until the tire pressure is at or above therecommended cold placard pressure. Once the low tirepressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring [TPM]Telltale Light) illuminates, you must increase the tirepressure to the recommended cold placard pressure inorder for the TPM Telltale Light to turn off. The systemwill automatically update and the TPM Telltale Lightwill turn off once the system receives the updated tire264 STARTING AND OPERATING
pressures. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to10 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for theTPMS to receive this information.−For example, your vehicle may have a recom-mended cold (parked for more than three hours)placard pressure of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambienttemperature is 68°F (20°C) and the measured tirepressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a temperature drop to20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to ap-proximately 26 psi (179 kPa). This tire pressure issufficiently low enough to turn ON the TPM TelltaleLight. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pres-sure to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), butthe TPM Telltale Light will still be ON. In thissituation, the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF onlyafter the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recom-mended cold placard pressure value.CAUTION!•The TPMS has been optimized for the originalequipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures andwarning have been established for the tire sizeequipped on your vehicle. Undesirable systemoperation or sensor damage may result when us-ing replacement equipment that is not of the samesize, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels cancause sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tiresealants or balance beads if your vehicle isequipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensorsmay result.•After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,always reinstall the valve stem cap. This willprevent moisture and dirt from entering the valvestem, which could damage the TPM sensor.STARTING AND OPERATING 2655
NOTE:•The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire careand maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failureor condition.•The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gaugewhile adjusting your tire pressure.•Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causesthe tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tiretread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling andstopping ability.•The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintaincorrect tire pressure using an accurate tire pressuregauge, even if under-inflation has not reached thelevel to trigger illumination of the TPM Telltale Light.•Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure inthe tire.Premium SystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wirelesstechnology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors tomonitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to eachwheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressurereadings to the receiver module.NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check thetire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthlyand to maintain the proper pressure.The TPMS consists of the following components:•Receiver module,•Four TPM sensors,266 STARTING AND OPERATING
•CORAX Receiver module,•Various TPMS messages, which display in the Elec-tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), and•TPM Telltale LightThe matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly (ifequipped) has a TPM sensor. The full size spare can beused in place of any of the four road tires. Aspare with apressure below the low-pressure limit will not cause theTPM Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound.Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure WarningsThe TPM Telltale Light will illuminate in theinstrument cluster and a chime will sound whentire pressure is low in one or more of the fouractive road tires. In addition, the EVIC will display one ormore low pressure messages (Left Front, Left Rear, RightFront, Right Rear) for three seconds and a graphicshowing the pressure values of each tire with the low tirepressure values flashing.STARTING AND OPERATING 2675
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possibleand inflate the tires with low pressure (those flashing inthe EVIC graphic) to the vehicle’s recommended coldplacard pressure value. Once the system receives theupdated tire pressures, the system will automaticallyupdate, the graphic display in the EVIC will stop flash-ing, and the TPM Telltale Light will turn off. The vehiclemay need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph(25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this informa-tion.Check TPMS WarningIf a system fault is detected, the TPM Telltale Light willflash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.The system fault will also sound a chime. In addition, theEVIC will display a 9CHECK TPM SYSTEM9message forthree seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of thepressure value to indicate which sensor is not beingreceived.268 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat,providing the system fault still exists. If the system faultno longer exists, the TPM Telltale Light will no longerflash, and the 9CHECK TPM SYSTEM9message will nolonger display, and a pressure value will display in placeof the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of thefollowing:1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or drivingnext to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies asthe TPM sensors.2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that containsmaterials that may block radio wave signals.3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels orwheel housings.4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors,or equipped with the incorrect type of TPM sensors.General InformationThis device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules andRSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to thefollowing conditions:•This device may not cause harmful interference.•This device must accept any interference received,including interference that may cause undesired op-eration.The TPM sensors are regulated under one of the follow-ing licenses:United States .....................KR5S120123Canada ........................2671-S120123STARTING AND OPERATING 2695
FUEL REQUIREMENTS6.1L EngineThe 6.1L engine is designed to meet allemissions regulations and provide excel-lent fuel economy and performance whenusing high-quality premium unleadedgasoline with an octane rating of 91 orhigher.Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful toyour engine. However, continued heavy spark knock athigh speeds can cause damage and immediate service isrequired. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems suchas hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experi-ence these symptoms, try another brand of gasolinebefore considering service for the vehicle.Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued andendorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the World-wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel propertiesnecessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recom-mends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC speci-fications if they are available.Reformulated GasolineMany areas of the country require the use of cleanerburning gasoline referred to as reformulated gasoline.Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are spe-cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-prove air quality.The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso-lines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro-vide excellent performance and durability of engine andfuel system components.270 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gasoline/Oxygenate BlendsSome fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-genates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. Oxygen-ates are required in some areas of the country during thewinter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used inyour vehicle.CAUTION!DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol or E85Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in startingand driveability problems and may damage criticalfuel system components.Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline or E85ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the manufac-turer. While MTBE is an oxygenate made from methanol,it does not have the negative effects of methanol.MMT In GasolineMMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that isblended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasolineblended with MMT provides no performance advantagebeyond gasoline of the same octane number withoutMMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark pluglife and reduces emissions system performance in somevehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasolinewithout MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT contentof gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whetherthe gasoline contains MMT. It is even more important tolook for gasoline without MMT in Canada, because MMTcan be used at levels higher than those allowed in theUnited States. MMT is prohibited in Federal and Califor-nia reformulated gasoline.STARTING AND OPERATING 2715
Materials Added to FuelAll gasoline sold in the United States is required tocontain effective detergent additives. Use of additionaldetergents or other additives is not needed under normalconditions and they would result in additional cost.Therefore, you should not have to add anything to thefuel.Fuel System CautionsCAUTION!Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’sperformance:•The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performanceand damage the emissions control system.•An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition mal-functions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat.If you notice a pungent burning odor or some lightsmoke, your engine may be out of tune or malfunc-tioning and may require immediate service. Contactyour authorized dealer for service assistance.•The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold asoctane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of theseproducts contain high concentrations of methanol.Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problemsresulting from the use of such fuels or additives is notthe responsibility of the manufacturer.NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions con-trol system can result in civil penalties being assessedagainst you.272 STARTING AND OPERATING
Carbon Monoxide WarningsWARNING!Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.Follow the precautions below to prevent carbonmonoxide poisoning:•Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbonmonoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can kill.Never run the engine in a closed area, such as agarage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with theengine running for an extended period. If the vehicle isstopped in an open area with the engine running formore than a short period, adjust the ventilation systemto force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.•Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte-nance. Have the exhaust system inspected every timethe vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditionsrepaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all sidewindows fully open.•Keep the trunk/liftgate closed when driving yourvehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poison-ous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.STARTING AND OPERATING 2735
ADDING FUELFuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on theleft side of the vehicle. Use a finger to pull open the door.If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the replacementcap is for use with this vehicle.NOTE: When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the captether in the hook, located on the fuel filler door.CAUTION!•Damage to the fuel system or emissions controlsystem could result from using an improper fueltank filler tube cap (gas cap).•A poorly fitting gas cap could let impurities intothe fuel system.•A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunc-tion Indicator Light (MIL) to turn on.•To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “topoff” the fuel tank after filling. When the fuelnozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.Fuel Fill Cap274 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!•Never have any smoking materials lit in or nearthe vehicle when the gas cap is removed or thetank filled.•Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine isrunning.•A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into aportable container that is inside of a vehicle. Youcould be burned. Always place gas containers onthe ground while filling.NOTE:•Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound.This is an indication that the gas cap is tightenedproperly. The MIL in the instrument cluster may turnon if the gas cap is not secured properly. Make surethat the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle isrefueled.•When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fueltank is full.Loose Fuel Filler Cap MessageIf the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuelfiller cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a“Check Gascap” message will display in the ElectronicVehicle Information Center (EVIC). If this occurs, tightenthe fuel filler cap properly and press the TRIP ODOM-ETER button to turn off the message. If the problemcontinues, the message will appear the next time thevehicle is started.A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler capmay also turn on the MIL. Refer to “Onboard DiagnosticSystem” in Section 7.STARTING AND OPERATING 2755
VEHICLE LOADINGThe load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown onthe “Vehicle Certification Label.” This informationshould be used for passenger and luggage loading asindicated.Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).Vehicle Certification LabelYour vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed tothe rear of the driver’s door.The label contains the following information:•Name of manufacturer•Month and year of manufacture•Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)•Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front•Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear•Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)•Type of Vehicle•Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN.Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The totalload must be limited so that you do not exceed theGVWR.Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rearaxles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axlesevenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front orrear GAWR.276 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it isimportant that you do not exceed the maximum frontor rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition canresult if either rating is exceeded. You could losecontrol of the vehicle and have an accident.OverloadingThe load carrying components (axle, springs, tires,wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactoryservice as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and thefront and rear GAWR.The best way to figure out the total weight of yourvehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready foroperation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure thatit is not over the GVWR.Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicleseparately. It is important that you distribute the loadevenly over the front and rear axles.Overloading can cause potential safety hazards andshorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspensioncomponents do not necessarily increase the vehicle’sGVWR.LoadingTo load your vehicle properly, first figure out its emptyweight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier itemsdown low and be sure you distribute their weight asevenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely beforedriving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that youhave exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is withinthe specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effecton the way your vehicle steers and handles and the waythe brakes operate.STARTING AND OPERATING 2775
NOTE: Refer to the “Vehicle Certification Label” affixedto the rear of the driver’s door for your vehicle’s GVWRand GAWRs.TRAILER TOWINGTrailer towing with this vehicle is not recommended.RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHINDMOTORHOME, ETC.)Recreational towing for this vehicle is not recommended.NOTE: If the vehicle requires towing, make sure all fourwheels are off the ground.278 STARTING AND OPERATING
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIESCONTENTSmHazard Warning Flasher ..................280mIf Your Engine Overheats .................280mTIREFIT Tire Repair .....................281mJump Starting .........................286mFreeing A Stuck Vehicle ..................289mTowing A Disabled Vehicle ................291▫Without The Ignition Key ...............291▫Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle(Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On TheGround) ............................291▫Towing This Vehicle Behind Another VehicleWith A Tow Dolly .....................2926
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERThe hazard warning switch is located in the switch banknear the bottom center of the instrument panel. Depressthe switch to activate the flashers. When activated, alldirectional turn signals will flash on and off to warnoncoming traffic of an emergency. Push the switch asecond time to turn off the flashers.This is an emergency warning system and it should notbe used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when yourvehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard forother motorists.When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, thehazard warning flashers will continue to operate eventhough the ignition switch is in the LOCK position.NOTE: With extended use, the hazard warning flashersmay wear down your battery.IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATSIn any of the following situations, you can reduce thepotential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac-tion.•On the highways — Slow down.•In city traffic — While stopped, put transmission inNEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.Hazard Warning Switch280 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow downan impending overheat condition. If your air conditioneris on, turn it off. The air conditioning system adds heat tothe engine cooling system and turning off the A/Cremoves this heat. You can also turn the Temperaturecontrol to maximum heat, the Mode control to floor, andthe Fan control to HI. This allows the heater core to act asa supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heatfrom the engine cooling system.CAUTION!Driving with a hot cooling system could damageyour vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads 240°F(116°C) or greater pull over and stop the vehicle. Idlethe vehicle with the air conditioner turned off untilthe pointer drops back into the normal range 200–230°F (93–110°C). If the pointer remains at 240°F(116°C) or greater and you hear a chime, turn theengine off immediately and call for service.WARNING!A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You orothers could be badly burned by steam or boilingcoolant. You may want to call a service center if yourvehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the hoodyourself, refer to Section 7 and follow the warningsunder the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph.TIREFIT TIRE REPAIRSmall punctures, particularly those in the tread, can besealed with TIREFIT. Foreign objects (e.g., screws ornails) should not be removed from the tire. TIREFIT canbe used in outside temperatures down to approximately-4°F (-20°C).WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 2816
The TIREFIT system is located under an access panel inthe trunk.1. Air pump hose2. Power plug and cable3. AIR PUMP switch4. Pressure gauge5. TIREFIT sealant bottle6. TIREFIT sealant hoseTIREFIT LocationTire Fit Kit282 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!•Do not attempt to repair a tire on the side of the vehicle close totraffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hitwhen operating the jack or repairing a tire.•Cuts or punctures larger than approximately 0.16 in (4 mm), tiredamage caused by driving with extremely low tire pressure or ona flat tire, or a damaged wheel can pose a hazard while driving.TIREFIT should not be used in such circumstances. Do not drivethe vehicle under such circumstances. Contact your nearest autho-rized dealer for assistance.•Take care not to allow the contents of TIREFIT to come in contactwith hair, eyes or clothing. TIREFIT is harmful if inhaled, swal-lowed, or absorbed through the skin: It causes skin, eye, andrespiratory irritation. Any contact with eyes or skin should beflushed immediately with plenty of water. If clothing comes incontact with TIREFIT, change clothing as soon as possible.•In case of allergic reaction or rash, consult a physician immedi-ately. Keep TIREFIT out of reach of children. If swallowed, rinsemouth immediately with plenty of water and drink plenty ofwater. Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physician immediately.•Keep away from open flame or heat source.Sealing Tire with TIREFIT1. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.2. Move the shift lever to the PARK position, turn OFFthe engine, and set the parking brake.3. Remove the TIREFIT kit from the trunk.4. Pull the power plug 2 and the TIREFIT sealant hose 6out from the TIREFIT kit.5. Unscrew the valve cap from the valve on the deflatedtire.6. Screw the fitting at the end of TIREFIT sealant hose 6coming from the sealant bottle 5 onto the tire valve.7. Insert the power plug 2 into the power point on theinstrument panel.8. Leave the parking brake set and the shift lever inPARK and start the engine.WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 2836
9. Press the switch 3 on the air pump to I (ON). The airpump should start to inflate the tire and the tire sealant(white fluid) will flow from the sealant bottle 5 throughthe TIREFIT sealant hose 6 and into the tire.10. Allow the air pump to run for five minutes and thenread the pressure gauge 4. If the tire inflates to 26 psi (1.8bar) or greater, proceed to Step 19 of this procedure. Ifnot, proceed to the following step.11. Press the AIR PUMP switch 3 to 0 (OFF). Then,disconnect the TIREFIT system from the tire and place itback in the vehicle.12. Release the parking brake and drive the vehicle backand forth approximately 30 ft (9.1 m) to distribute thesealant more evenly within the tire.13. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.14. Move the shift lever to the PARK position, turn OFFthe engine, and set the parking brake.15. Disconnect the air pump hose 1 from the undersideof the sealant bottle 5 by flipping the hose valve open.16. Connect the air pump hose valve to the tire valve andflip the hose valve closed.17. Leave the parking brake set and the shift lever inPARK and start the engine.18. Press the switch 3 on the air pump to I (ON). The airpump should inflate the tire to at least 26 psi (1.8 bar)within five minutes. If the tire inflates to this level,proceed to the following step. NOTE: If a tire pressure of26 psi (1.8 bar) is not obtained within five minutes, thetire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive thevehicle further. Call for assistance.19. With a tire pressure of no less than 26 psi (1.8 bar)press the AIR PUMP switch 3 to 0 (OFF) and turn off theengine. Then, disconnect the TIREFIT system from thetire and place it back in the vehicle.284 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
20. Release the parking brake and drive the vehicle forapproximately 10 minutes to ensure optimum distribu-tion of the tire sealant within the tire.21. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.22. Move the shift lever to the PARK position, turn OFFthe engine, and set the parking brake.23. Disconnect the air pump hose 1 from the undersideof the sealant bottle 5 by flipping the hose valve open.24. Connect the air pump hose valve to the tire valve andflip the hose valve closed.25. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the pressuregauge 4. If the pressure is 19 psi (1.3 bar) or greater,proceed to the following step. NOTE: If the pressure isless than 19 psi (1.3 bar), the tire is too badly damaged.Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further. Call forassistance.26. Leave the parking brake set and the shift lever inPARK and start the engine.27. Inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tirepressure label on the driver-side latch pillar by pressingthe switch 3 on the air pump to I (ON) and watching thepressure gauge. When the tire pressure is set to thepressure indicated on the tire pressure label, press theAIR PUMP switch 3 to 0 (OFF) and turn off the engine.28. Disconnect the TIREFIT system from the tire andreinstall the valve cap.29. Place the sealant kit back in the trunk of the vehicle.Replace the sealant bottle at your nearest authorizedMOPARtparts dealership.30. Have the tire inspected at the earliest opportunity atan authorized dealer or tire service center.WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 2856
NOTE:•If a pressure of at least 19 psi (1.3 bar) cannot bemaintained in the tire, the tire is too badly damaged.Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further. Call forassistance.•Do not operate the electric air pump for more thaneight minutes to avoid overheating. The air pump maybe used again once it has cooled down.•Replace the TIREFIT sealant bottle 5 once every fouryears to assure optimum operation of the system.•If TIREFIT is liquid, clean water and a damp cloth willremove the material from the vehicle or tire and wheelcomponents. Once TIREFIT sealing material has dried,it can easily be peeled off and properly discarded.•Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h) until the tire hasbeen inspected.JUMP STARTINGWARNING!•Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised.It can start anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can be hurt by the fan.•Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started. Vehiclesequipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way.Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the enginehas started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle. If the vehiclehas a discharged battery, booster cables may be used to obtain a startfrom another vehicle. This type of start can be dangerous if doneimproperly, so follow this procedure carefully.•Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution; do not allow battery fluid tocontact eyes, skin, or clothing. Don’t lean over battery when attachingclamps or allow the clamps to touch each other. If acid splashes in eyesor on skin, flush contaminated area immediately with large quantitiesof water.•A battery generates hydrogen gas, which is flammable and explosive.Keep flame or spark away from the vent holes.•Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an outputthat exceeds 12 Volts.•The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that should not be disconnectedand should only be replaced with a battery of the same type (vented).286 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: The battery is stored under an access cover inthe trunk. Remote battery terminals are located in theengine compartment for jump-starting.1. Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelrysuch as watchbands or bracelets that might make aninadvertent electrical contact.2. When boost is provided by a battery in anothervehicle, park that vehicle within booster cable reach, butdo not allow the vehicles to touch one another.WARNING!Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as thiscould establish a ground connection and personalinjury could result.3. Set the parking brake, place the automatic transmis-sion in PARK, and turn the ignition switch to the LOCKposition on both vehicles.4. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electri-cal loads.5. Connect one end of the jumper cable to the remotejump-start positive battery post (+) in the engine com-partment. Connect the other end of the same cable to thepositive terminal of the booster battery. Refer to thefollowing illustration for jump-starting connections.WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 2876
6. Connect the other cable, first to the negative terminalof the booster battery and then to the engine ground (-)of the vehicle with the discharged battery. Make sureyou have a good contact on the engine ground. Refer tothe following illustration for jump-starting connections.7. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the boosterbattery. Let the engine idle a few minutes. Then, start theengine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.NOTE: Refer to 9Synchronizing ESP9under 9ElectronicStability Program9in Section 5 if the ESP/BAS light (inthe instrument cluster) remains on continuously afterstarting the engine of the vehicle with the dischargedbattery.8. When removing the jumper cables, reverse the abovesequence exactly. Be careful of the moving belts and fan.Jump-Starting288 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!•You should not try to start your vehicle by pushingor towing.•Do not connect the cable to the negative post of thedischarged battery. The resulting electrical sparkcould cause the battery to explode.•During cold weather when temperatures are be-low the freezing point, electrolyte in a dischargedbattery may freeze. Do not attempt jump-startingbecause the battery could rupture or explode. Thebattery temperature must be brought above thefreezing point before attempting jump-start.FREEING A STUCK VEHICLEIf your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, itcan often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn yoursteering wheel right and left to clear the area around thefront wheels. Then shift back and forth between RE-VERSE and DRIVE. Usually, the least accelerator pedalpressure to maintain the rocking motion without spin-ning the wheels is most effective.NOTE: Turn off the Electronic Stability Program (ESP)before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic StabilityProgram,” or “Traction Control” in Section 5.WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 2896
CAUTION!•When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by moving be-tween “1st” and REVERSE, do not spin the wheelsfaster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damagemay result.•Racing the engine or spinning the wheels too fastmay lead to transmission overheating and failure.It can also damage the tires. Do not spin thewheels above 35 mph (55 km/h).WARNING!Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 35mph (55 km/h) when you are stuck, and don’t letanyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what thespeed.290 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLEWithout The Ignition KeySpecial care must be taken when the vehicle is towedwith the ignition in the LOCK position. The only ap-proved method of towing without the ignition key iswith a flat-bed truck. Proper towing equipment is neces-sary to prevent damage to the vehicle.Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle (FlatTowing With All Four Wheels On The Ground)Flat towing of vehicles equipped with an automatictransmission is only permitted within the followinglimitations.With The Ignition KeyYour vehicle may be towed under the following condi-tions: The shift lever must be in NEUTRAL, the distanceto be traveled must not exceed 30 mi (48 km), and thetowing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).Exceeding these towing limits may cause a transmissiongeartrain failure. If the transmission is not operative or ifthe vehicle is to be towed more than 30 mi (48 km), thevehicle must be transported using a flat-bed truck.WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 2916
CAUTION!•Do not attempt to tow this vehicle from the frontwith sling type towing equipment. Damage to thefront fascia will result.•If the transmission is not operative or if thevehicle is to be towed more than 30 mi (48 km),then the only approved method of towing is witha flat-bed truck. Damage to the transmission mayresult.•Do not tow the vehicle from the rear. Damage tothe rear sheet metal and fascia will occur.•Do not push or tow this vehicle with anothervehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and trans-mission may result.If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)while being towed, the key must be in the ON position,not the ACC position. Make certain the transmissionremains in NEUTRAL.Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle WithA Tow DollyThe manufacturer does not recommend that you tow thisvehicle on a tow dolly. Vehicle damage may occur.292 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLECONTENTSmEngine Compartment — 6.1L ..............296mOnboard Diagnostic System — OBD II ........297▫Loose Fuel Filler Cap ..................297mEmissions Inspection And MaintenancePrograms ............................298mReplacement Parts ......................299mDealer Service .........................300mMaintenance Procedures ..................300▫Engine Oil ..........................301▫Engine Oil Filter ......................303▫Drive Belts — Check Condition And Tension...303▫Spark Plugs .........................304▫Engine Air Cleaner Filter ................304▫Fuel Filter ..........................304▫Catalytic Converter ....................305▫Maintenance-Free Battery ................307▫Air Conditioner Maintenance .............309▫A/C Air Filter — If Equipped ............3107
▫Power Steering — Fluid Check ............310▫Front And Rear Suspension Ball Joints ......311▫Steering Linkage ......................311▫Body Lubrication .....................311▫Windshield Wiper Blades ................312▫Windshield Washers ...................312▫Exhaust System ......................313▫Cooling System .......................314▫Hoses And Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses .......319▫Fuel System .........................319▫Brake System ........................320▫Automatic Transmission ................322▫Front And Rear Wheel Bearings ...........324▫Appearance Care And Protection FromCorrosion ...........................324▫Cleaning The Center Console Cupholders ....328mFuses ...............................329▫Integrated Power Module (IPM) ...........329▫Rear Power Distribution Center ...........331mVehicle Storage ........................335mReplacement Light Bulbs .................336mBulb Replacement ......................337▫Low Beam Headlight, High Beam Headlight,And Park/Turn Light — Models With HighIntensity Discharge (HID) Headlights .......337▫Front/Rear Side Marker Light ............338▫Tail/Turn/Stop Light ..................338294 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫Center Tail/Backup Light ...............340▫Center High-Mounted Stop Light (CHMSL) . . .340▫License Light ........................340mFluid Capacities ........................341mFluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts ........342▫Engine .............................342▫Chassis ............................343MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 2957
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 6.1L1 — Remote Jump-Start Positive Battery Post 6 — Power Steering Fluid2 — Fuses (Integrated Power Module) 7 — Air Cleaner Filter3 — Coolant Pressure Cap 8 — Engine Oil Fill4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 9 — Engine Oil Dipstick5 — Coolant Bottle 10 — Windshield Washer Fluid Bottle296 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD IIYour vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboarddiagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitorsthe performance of the emissions, engine, and automatictransmission control systems. When these systems areoperating properly, your vehicle will provide excellentperformance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis-sions well within current government regulations.If any of these systems require service, the OBD II systemwill turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It willalso store diagnostic codes and other information toassist your service technician in making repairs. Al-though your vehicle will usually be drivable and notneed towing, see your authorized dealer for service assoon as possible.CAUTION!Prolonged driving with the MIL on could causefurther damage to the emissions control system. Itcould also affect fuel economy and driveability. Thevehicle must be serviced before any emissions testscan be performed.If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,severe catalytic converter damage and power losswill soon occur. Immediate service is required.Loose Fuel Filler CapIf the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuelfiller cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a“Check Gascap” message will display in the ElectronicVehicle Information Center (EVIC) (if equipped). If thisoccurs, tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press theMAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 2977
Trip Odometer button to turn off the message. If theproblem continues, the message will appear the next timethe vehicle is started.A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler capmay also turn on the MIL.EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCEPROGRAMSIn some localities, it may be a legal requirement to passan inspection of this vehicle’s emissions control system.Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-nance (I/M), this check verifies the MalfunctionIndicator Light (MIL) is functioning and is not onwhen the engine is running, and that the OBD II systemis ready for testing.Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD IIsystem may not be ready if the vehicle was recentlyserviced, recently had a dead battery, or a battery replace-ment. If the OBD II system should be determined notready for the I/M test, the vehicle may fail the test.This vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,which you can use prior to going to the test station. Tocheck if this vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you mustdo the following:1. Insert the ignition key into the ignition switch.2. Turn the ignition to the ON position, but do not crankor start the engine.3. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to startthis test over.4. As soon as you turn the ignition key to the ONposition, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part ofa normal bulb check.298 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
5. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things willhappen:a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and thenreturn to being fully illuminated until you turn OFFthe ignition key or start the engine. This means that thevehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you shouldnot proceed to the I/M station.b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fullyilluminated until you turn OFF the ignition key or startthe engine. This means that the vehicle’s OBD IIsystem is ready, and you can proceed to the I/Mstation.If the OBD II system is not ready, you should see anauthorized dealer or repair facility. If this vehicle wasrecently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,you may need to do nothing more than drive the vehicleas you normally would in order for the OBD II system toupdate. A recheck with the above test routine may thenindicate that the system is now ready.Regardless of whether the vehicle’s OBD II system isready or not ready, if the MIL is illuminated duringnormal vehicle operation, you should have the vehicleserviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M stationcan fail the vehicle because the MIL is on with the enginerunning.REPLACEMENT PARTSUse of genuine MOPARtparts for normal/scheduledmaintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en-sure the designed performance. Damage or failurescaused by the use of non-MOPARtparts for maintenanceand repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’swarranty.MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 2997
DEALER SERVICEYour authorized dealer has the qualified service person-nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all serviceoperations in an expert manner. Service manuals areavailable which include detailed service information foryour vehicle. Refer to these service manuals beforeattempting any procedure yourself.NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions controlsystems can result in civil penalties being assessedagainst you.WARNING!You can be badly injured working on or around amotor vehicle. Only do service work for which youhave the knowledge and the proper equipment. If youhave any doubt about your ability to perform a servicejob, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.MAINTENANCE PROCEDURESThe pages that follow contain the required maintenanceservices determined by the engineers who designed yourvehicle.Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixedmaintenance intervals, there are other items that shouldoperate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance.However, if a malfunction of these items does occur, itcould adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance.These items should be inspected if a malfunction isobserved or suspected.300 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine OilChecking Oil LevelTo assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil mustbe maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level atregular intervals, such as every fuel stop.The best time to check the engine oil level is about fiveminutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off or beforestarting the engine after it has sat overnight.Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground willimprove the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintainthe oil level in the “SAFE” range. Adding 1.0 qt (1.0 L) ofoil when the reading is at the bottom of the “SAFE” rangewill result in an oil level at the top of the “SAFE” rangeon these engines.CAUTION!Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration orloss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.Change Engine OilRefer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8.NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil changeintervals exceed 6,000 mi (10 000 km) or six months,whichever occurs first.MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 3017
Engine Oil SelectionFor best performance and maximum protection under alltypes of operating conditions, the manufacturer onlyrecommends full synthetic engine oils that meet theAmerican Petroleum Institute (API) categories of SM orSM/CF, and meet the requirements of Chrysler MaterialStandard MS-10725.The manufacturer recommends the use of a full syntheticengine oil, such as Mobil 1tSAE 0W-40 or equivalent.Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade)SAE 0W-40 engine oil is preferred for use in 6.1L engineswithin the operating temperatures shown in the engineoil viscosity chart. SAE 5W-40 engine oil is also allowedfor use in 6.1Lengines. The proper SAE viscosity grade ofengine oil should be selected based on the followingrecommendation and be within the operating tempera-ture shown in the engine oil viscosity chart.The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommendedengine oil viscosity for your engine. For information onengine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Com-partment” illustration in this section.302 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Materials Added to Engine OilThe manufacturer strongly recommends against the addi-tion of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to theengine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and itsperformance may be impaired by supplemental additives.Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil FiltersCare should be taken in disposing of used engine oil andoil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to theenvironment. Contact your authorized dealer, service sta-tion, or governmental agency for advice on how and whereused oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.Engine Oil FilterThe engine oil filter should be replaced at every engineoil change.Engine Oil Filter SelectionThis manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oilfilter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The qualityof replacement filters varies considerably. Only highquality filters should be used to assure most efficientservice. MOPARtengine oil filters are a high quality oilfilter and are recommended.Drive Belts — Check Condition And TensionBelt tension is controlled by means of an automatictensioner. Therefore, no belt tension adjustments arerequired. However, belt and belt tensioner conditionshould be inspected periodically and replaced if re-quired. Improper belt tension can cause belt slippage andfailure. Low generator belt tension can cause batteryfailure.Inspect belts for evidence of cuts, cracks, glazing, orfrayed cords and replace if there is indication of damagethat could result in belt failure. Also, check belt routing tomake sure there is no interference between the belts andother engine components. See your authorized dealer forservice.MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 3037
Spark PlugsSpark plugs must fire properly to assure engine perfor-mance and emissions control. New plugs should beinstalled at the specified mileage. The entire set should bereplaced if there is any malfunction due to a faulty sparkplug. Malfunctioning spark plugs can damage the cata-lytic converter. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and GenuineParts” in this section for the proper type of spark plug foruse in your vehicle.Engine Air Cleaner FilterRefer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for engineair cleaner filter maintenance intervals.NOTE: Be sure to follow the “dusty or off-road condi-tions” maintenance interval if applicable.WARNING!The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) canprovide a measure of protection in the case of enginebackfire. Do not remove the air induction system (aircleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessaryfor repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one isnear the engine compartment before starting thevehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result inserious personal injury.Fuel FilterAplugged fuel filter can cause stalling, limit the speed atwhich a vehicle can be driven or cause hard starting.Should an excessive amount of dirt accumulate in thefuel tank, filter replacement may be necessary. See yourauthorized dealer for service.304 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Catalytic ConverterThe catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuelonly. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of thecatalyst as an emissions control device.Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assureproper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalystdamage.CAUTION!Damage to the catalytic converter can result if yourvehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. Inthe event of engine malfunction, particularly involv-ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Contin-ued operation of your vehicle with a severemalfunction could cause the converter to overheat,resulting in possible damage to the converter and thevehicle.NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions controlsystems can result in civil penalties being assessedagainst you.MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 3057
WARNING!A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park overmaterials that can burn. Such materials might begrass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaustsystem. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areaswhere your exhaust system can contact anything thatcan burn.In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioningengine operation, a scorching odor may indicate severeand abnormal catalyst overheating. If this should occur,safely bring the vehicle to a complete stop, shut theengine OFF, and allow the vehicle to cool. Thereafter,obtain service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’sspecifications immediately.To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage:•Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignitionwhen the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is inmotion.•Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing thevehicle.•Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wiresdisconnected or removed, such as when diagnostictesting, or for prolonged periods during very roughidling or malfunctioning operating conditions.306 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Maintenance-Free BatteryThe top of the maintenance-free battery is permanentlysealed. You will never have to add water, nor is periodicmaintenance required.NOTE: The battery is stored under an access cover inthe trunk. Remote battery terminals are located in theengine compartment for jump starting (Refer to JumpStarting in Section 6 of this manual).Battery LocationMAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 3077
WARNING!•Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burnor even blind you. Don’t allow battery fluid to contactyour eyes, skin, or clothing. Don’t lean over a batterywhen attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or onskin, flush the area immediately with large amounts ofwater.•Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame orsparks away from the battery. Don’t use a boosterbattery or any other booster source with an outputgreater than 12 Volts. Don’t allow cable clamps to toucheach other.•Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories containlead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.•The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that shouldnot be disconnected and should only be replaced witha battery of the same type (vented).CAUTION!•It is essential when replacing the cables on thebattery that the positive cable is attached to thepositive post and the negative cable is attached tothe negative post. Battery posts are marked posi-tive (+) and negative (-) and identified on thebattery case. Cable clamps should be tight on theterminal posts and free of corrosion.•If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is inthe vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cablesbefore connecting the charger to the battery. Donot use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.308 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Air Conditioner MaintenanceFor best possible performance, your air conditionershould be checked and serviced by an authorized dealerat the start of each warm season. This service shouldinclude cleaning of the condenser fins and a performancetest. Drive belt tension should also be checked at thistime.WARNING!•Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricantsapproved by the manufacturer for your air condi-tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants areflammable and can explode, injuring you. Otherunapproved refrigerants or lubricants can causethe system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer toSection 3 of the Warranty Information book forfurther warranty information.•The air conditioning system contains refrigerantunder high pressure. To avoid risk of personalinjury or damage to the system, adding refrigerantor any repair requiring lines to be disconnectedshould be done by an experienced technician.MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 3097
Refrigerant Recovery and RecyclingR-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the EnvironmentalProtectionAgency and is an ozone-saving product. How-ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioningservice be performed by authorized dealers or otherservice facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C systemsealers, stop leak products, seal conditioners, compressoroil, and refrigerants.A/C Air Filter — If EquippedThe filter is located in the fresh air inlet under the hood,behind a removable panel in the cowl on the passengerside of the vehicle, next to the windshield wipers. Wheninstalling a new filter, ensure its proper orientation. Toreplace the filter, remove the access door in the cowlscreen by pressing the retaining clips. Slide the lid on thefilter adapter forward and down and remove the usedfilter. Install the new filter with arrows pointing in thedirection of airflow, which is toward the rear of thevehicle (text and arrows on the filter indicate this).Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for therecommended air conditioning filter replacement inter-vals.Power Steering — Fluid CheckChecking the power steering fluid level at a definedservice interval is not required. The fluid should only bechecked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises areapparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici-pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho-rized dealer. No chemical flushes should be used in anypower steering system; only the approved lubricant maybe used.310 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!Fluid level should be checked on a level surface andwith the engine OFF to prevent injury from movingparts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Donot overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommendedpower steering fluid.If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicatedlevel. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from allsurfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and GenuineParts” in this section for the correct fluid type.Front And Rear Suspension Ball JointsThe suspension ball joints should be inspected for exter-nal leakage or damage when other maintenance is per-formed.Steering LinkageThe tie rod end ball joints should be inspected forexternal leakage or damage when other maintenance isperformed.Body LubricationLocks and all body pivot points, including seat tracks,door hinges, trunk hinges, and hood hinges, should belubricated periodically to assure quiet, easy operationand to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the appli-cation of any lubricant, the parts concerned should bewiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating,excess oil and grease should be removed. Particularattention should also be given to hood latching compo-nents to ensure proper function. When performing otherunderhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism,and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 3117
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice ayear, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a smallamount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPARtLock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into thelock cylinder.Windshield Wiper BladesThe rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshieldshould be cleaned periodically with a sponge or soft clothand a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accu-mulations of salt or road film.Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periodsmay cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always usewasher fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirtfrom a dry windshield.Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice fromthe windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact withpetroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.Windshield WashersThe windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in thefront of the engine compartment. Be sure to check thefluid level in the reservoir at regular intervals. Fill thereservoir with windshield washer solvent (not radiatorantifreeze) and operate the system for a few seconds toflush out the residual water.When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, apply somewasher fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiperblades clean. This will help blade performance.To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer systemin cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets orexceeds the temperature range of your climate. Thisrating information can be found on most washer fluidcontainers.The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gal (4 l) of washerfluid when the message “Low Washer Fluid” appears inthe Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC).312 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!Commercially available windshield washer solventsare flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Caremust be exercised when filling or working aroundthe washer solution.Exhaust SystemThe best protection against carbon monoxide entry intothe vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaustsystem.Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaustsystem, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside thevehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle isdamaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Openseams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumesto seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raisedfor lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.WARNING!Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbonmonoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.Breathing it can make you unconscious and caneventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, referto “Exhaust Gas” under “Safety Tips” in Section 2.MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 3137
Cooling SystemWARNING!•When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis-connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignitionswitch to the LOCK position. The fan is tempera-ture controlled and can start at any time theignition switch is in the ON position.•You or others can be badly burned by hot coolantor steam from your radiator. If you see or hearsteam coming from under the hood, don’t open thehood until the radiator has had time to cool. Nevertry to open a cooling system pressure cap when theradiator is hot.Coolant ChecksCheck engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12months (before the onset of freezing weather, whereapplicable). If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance, thesystem should be drained, flushed, and refilled withfresh coolant. Check the front of the A/C condenser forany accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean bygently spraying water from a garden hose verticallydown the face of the condenser.Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub-ber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connectionat the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system forleaks.With the engine at normal operating temperature (butnot running), check the cooling system pressure cap forproper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount ofcoolant from the radiator drain cock. If the cap is sealingproperly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to314 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
drain from the coolant recovery bottle. DO NOT RE-MOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THECOOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.Cooling System — Drain, Flush, and RefillThe system should be drained, flushed, and refilled at theintervals shown in the Maintenance Schedule in Section8.If the solution is dirty or contains a considerable amountof sediment, clean and flush with a reliable coolingsystem cleaner. Follow with a thorough rinsing to removeall deposits and chemicals. Properly dispose of oldantifreeze solution.Selection of CoolantUse only the manufacturer’s recommended coolant. Re-fer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in thissection for the correct coolant type.CAUTION!•Mixing of coolants other than specified HOATengine coolants may result in engine damage andmay decrease corrosion protection. If a non-HOATcoolant is introduced into the cooling system in anemergency, it should be replaced with the speci-fied coolant as soon as possible.•Do not use plain water alone or alcohol-basedengine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not useadditional rust inhibitors or antirust products, asthey may not be compatible with the radiatorengine coolant and may plug the radiator.•This vehicle has not been designed for use withpropylene glycol-based coolants. Use of propyleneglycol-based coolants is not recommended.MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 3157
Adding CoolantYour vehicle has been built with an improved enginecoolant that allows extended maintenance intervals. Thiscoolant can be used up to five years or 100,000 mi (160000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing thisextended maintenance period, it is important that youuse the same coolant throughout the life of your vehicle.Please review these recommendations for using HybridOrganic Additive Technology (HOAT) coolant.When adding coolant:•The manufacturer recommends using MOPARtAntifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile FormulaHOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology).•Mix a minimum solution of 50% HOAT engine coolantand distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not toexceed 70%) if temperatures below 234°F (237°C) areanticipated.•Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-ized water when mixing the water/engine coolantsolution. The use of lower quality water will reducethe amount of corrosion protection in the enginecooling system.Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-cording to the temperatures occurring in the area wherethe vehicle is operated.NOTE: Mixing coolant types will decrease the life of theengine coolant and will require more frequent coolantchanges.Cooling System Pressure CapThe cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of coolantand to ensure that coolant will return to the radiator fromthe coolant recovery bottle.316 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is anyaccumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.WARNING!•The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” onthe cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre-caution. Never add coolant when the engine isoverheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap tocool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure tobuild up in the cooling system. To prevent scald-ing or injury, do not remove the pressure cap whilethe system is hot or under pressure.•Do not use a pressure cap other than the onespecified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en-gine damage may result.Disposal of Used CoolantUsed ethylene glycol-based engine coolant is a regulatedsubstance requiring proper disposal. Check with yourlocal authorities to determine the disposal rules for yourcommunity. To prevent ingestion by animals or children,do not store ethylene glycol-based engine coolant in opencontainers or allow it to remain in puddles on theground. If ingested by a child, contact a physicianimmediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.Coolant LevelThe coolant bottle provides a quick visual method fordetermining that the coolant level is adequate. With theengine OFF and cold, the level of the coolant in the bottleshould be between the ranges indicated on the bottle.The radiator normally remains completely full, so there isno need to remove the radiator cap unless checking forcoolant freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise yourMAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 3177
service attendant of this. As long as the engine operatingtemperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need onlybe checked once a month.When additional coolant is needed to maintain theproper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle. Donot overfill.Points to RememberNOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles(kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor comingfrom the front of the engine compartment. This is nor-mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or highhumidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot coolant toenter the radiator.If an examination of your engine compartment shows noevidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may besafely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.•Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.•Check coolant freeze point in the radiator and in thecoolant recovery bottle. If antifreeze needs to beadded, contents of coolant recovery bottle must also beprotected against freezing.•If frequent coolant additions are required, or if thelevel in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop whenthe engine cools, the cooling system should be pres-sure tested for leaks.•Maintain coolant concentration at 50% HOAT enginecoolant (minimum) and distilled water for propercorrosion protection of your engine, which containsaluminum components.•Make sure that the radiator and coolant recoverybottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.318 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
•Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle isequipped with air conditioning, keep the front of thecondenser clean, also.•Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winteroperation. If replacement is ever necessary, installONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs mayresult in unsatisfactory coolant performance, poor gasmileage, and increased emissions.Hoses And Vacuum/Vapor HarnessesInspect surfaces of hoses and nylon tubing for evidenceof heat and mechanical damage. Hard or soft spots,brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and exces-sive swelling indicate deterioration of the rubber.Pay particular attention to those hoses nearest to highheat sources such as the exhaust manifold. Inspect hoserouting to be sure hoses do not come in contact with anyheat source or moving component, which may cause heatdamage or mechanical wear.Ensure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted orcollapsed.Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and cou-plings to make sure they are secure and no leaks arepresent.Components should be replaced immediately if there isany evidence of wear or damage that could cause failure.Fuel SystemThe Electronic Fuel Injection high-pressure fuel system’shoses and quick connect fittings have unique materialcharacteristics that provide adequate sealing and resistattack by deteriorated gasoline.You are urged to use only the manufacturer’s specifiedhoses with quick connect fittings, or their equivalent inmaterial and specification, in any fuel system servicing. Itis mandatory to replace any damaged hoses or quickconnect fittings that have been removed during service.MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 3197
Care should be taken with installing quick connectfittings to ensure they are properly installed and fullyconnected. See your authorized dealer for service.Brake SystemIn order to assure brake system performance, all brakesystem components should be inspected periodically.Suggested service intervals can be found in the Mainte-nance Schedule in Section 8.WARNING!Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure andpossibly an accident. Driving with your foot restingor riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormallyhigh brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, andpossible brake damage. You wouldn’t have your fullbraking capacity in an emergency.Brake and Power Steering HosesWhen the vehicle is serviced for scheduled maintenance,inspect surface of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence ofheat and mechanical damage. Hard and brittle rubber,cracking, tears, cuts, abrasion, and excessive swellingindicate deterioration of the rubber. Particular attentionshould be made to examining those hose surfaces nearestto high heat sources, such as the exhaust manifold.Ensure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted orcollapsed.Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and cou-plings to make sure they are secure and no leaks arepresent.NOTE:•Often, fluid such as oil, power steering fluid, andbrake fluid are used during assembly plant operationsto facilitate the assembly of hoses to couplings. There-fore, oil wetness at the hose-coupling area is not320 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
necessarily an indication of leakage. Actual drippingof hot fluid when systems are under pressure (duringvehicle operation), should be noted before a hose isreplaced based on leakage.•Inspect the brake hoses whenever the brake system isserviced and at every engine oil change. Inspect hy-draulic brake hoses for surface cracking, scuffing, orworn spots. If there is any evidence of cracking,scuffing, or worn spots, the hose should be replacedimmediately. Eventual deterioration of the hose cantake place resulting in a possibility of a burst failure.WARNING!Worn brake hoses can burst and cause brake failure.You could have an accident. If you see any signs ofcracking, scuffing, or worn spots, have the brakehoses replaced immediately.Master Cylinder - Brake Fluid Level CheckCheck the fluid level in the master cylinder immediatelyif the brake system warning light indicates system fail-ure.Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when per-forming underhood services.Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removingthe cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the“FULL” mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir.Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it maycause leaking in the system.Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the require-ments described on the brake fluid reservoir. With discbrakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brakepads wear. However, low fluid level may be caused by aleak and a checkup may be needed.MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 3217
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Re-fer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in thissection for the correct fluid type.WARNING!•Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result inspilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and thebrake fluid catching fire.•Use of a brake fluid that may have a lower initialboiling point, or is unidentified as to specification,may result in sudden brake failure during hardprolonged braking. You could have an accident.Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closedcontainer to avoid contamination from foreign matter ormoisture.CAUTION!Do not allow petroleum-based fluid to contaminatethe brake fluid. Seal damage may result.Automatic TransmissionFluid Level CheckRegular automatic transmission fluid level checks are notrequired. For this reason, the dipstick is omitted.If you notice fluid loss or gear shift malfunction, haveyour authorized dealer check the transmission fluid level.322 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!•Using a transmission fluid other than the manu-facturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterio-ration in transmission shift quality and/or torqueconverter shudder. Using a transmission fluidother than that recommended by the manufacturerwill result in more frequent fluid and filterchanges. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genu-ine Parts” in this section for the correct fluid type.•The fluid level is preset at the factory and it doesnot require adjustment under normal operatingconditions. If a transmission fluid leak occurs,visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severedamage to the transmission may occur. Your au-thorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust thefluid level accurately.Fluid and Filter ChangesRefer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for therecommended transmission fluid and filter change inter-vals.If the transmission is disassembled for any reason, thefluid and filter should be changed.Selection of LubricantIt is important that the proper lubricant is used in thetransmission to assure optimum transmission perfor-mance. Use only manufacturer’s recommended transmis-sion fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and GenuineParts” in this section for the correct fluid type. It isimportant that the transmission fluid be maintained atthe prescribed level using the recommended fluid. Nochemical flushes should be used in any transmission;only the approved lubricant may be used.MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 3237
Special AdditivesAutomatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineeredproduct and its performance may be impaired by supple-mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addi-tives to the transmission. The only exception to thispolicy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluidleaks. In addition, avoid using transmission sealers asthey may adversely affect seals.Front And Rear Wheel BearingsFront and rear wheel bearings are permanently sealed.No regular maintenance is required for these compo-nents.Appearance Care And Protection From CorrosionProtection of Body and Paint from CorrosionVehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roadspassable in snow and ice, and chemicals that are sprayedon trees and road surfaces during other seasons, arehighly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outsideparking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contami-nants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated,extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme condi-tions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, andunderbody protection.The following maintenance recommendations will enableyou to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosionresistance built into your vehicle.What Causes Corrosion?Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal ofpaint and protective coatings from your vehicle.The most common causes are:•Road salt, dirt, and moisture accumulation.•Stone and gravel impact.•Insects, tree sap, and tar.324 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
•Salt in the air near seacoast localities.•Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.Washing•Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-hicle in the shade using MOPARtCar Wash or a mildcar wash soap, and rinse the panels completely withclear water.•If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu-lated on your vehicle, use MOPARtSuper Kleen Bugand Tar Remover to remove.•Use MOPARtCleaner Wax to remove road film, stainsand to protect your paint finish. Take care never toscratch the paint.•Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffingthat may diminish the gloss or thin out the paintfinish.CAUTION!Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials suchas steel wool or scouring powder that will scratchmetal and painted surfaces.Special Care•If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drivenear the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least oncea month.•It is important that the drain holes in the lower edgesof the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clearand open.•If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs isconsidered the responsibility of the owner.MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 3257
•If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident orsimilar cause that destroys the paint and protectivecoating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos-sible. The cost of such repairs is considered the respon-sibility of the owner.•If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are wellpackaged and sealed.•If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, considermud or stone shields behind each wheel.•Use MOPARtTouch Up Paint or equivalent onscratches as soon as possible. Your authorized dealerhas touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle.Wheel and Wheel Trim CareAll wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum andchrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with amild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To removeheavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use MOPARtWheel Cleaner (05066247AB) or equivalent or select anonabrasive, non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouringpads, steel wool, a bristle brush, or metal polishes. OnlyMOPARtor equivalent is recommended. Do not useoven cleaner. Avoid automatic car washes that use acidicsolutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels’protective finish.Interior CareUse MOPARtFabric Cleaner or equivalent to clean fabricupholstery and MOPARtCarpet Cleaner for carpeting.Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a dampcloth, or MOPARtSatin Select. Do not use harsh cleanersor Armorall. Use MOPARtTotal Clean to clean vinylupholstery.MOPARtTotal Clean is specifically recommended forleather upholstery.326 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regularcleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirtcan act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholsteryand should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft clothand MOPARtTotal Clean or equivalent. Care should betaken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with anyliquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to cleanyour leather upholstery. Application of a leather condi-tioner is not required to maintain the original condition.WARNING!Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.Many are potentially flammable, and if used inclosed areas they may cause respiratory harm.Cleaning HeadlightsYour vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter andless susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass; and therefore,different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses andreducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. Toremove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-lowed by rinsing.Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steelwool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.Glass SurfacesAll glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basiswith MOPARtGlass Cleaner or any commercialhousehold-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive typecleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win-dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rearMAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 3277
quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Donot use scrapers or other sharp instruments that mayscratch the elements.When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on thetowel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleanerdirectly on the mirror.Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster LensesThe lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle aremolded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, caremust be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.1. Clean with a wet soft rag or micro-fiber towel. A mildsoap solution may be used, but do not use high alcoholcontent or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe cleanwith a clean damp rag.2. Dry with a soft tissue.Seat Belt MaintenanceDo not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemicalsolvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.If the belts need cleaning, use MOPARtTotal Clean, amild soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not removethe belts from the vehicle to wash them.Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if thebuckles do not work properly.Cleaning The Center Console CupholdersClean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergentwith the cupholder in the center console.NOTE: The cupholder cannot be removed.328 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FUSESIntegrated Power Module (IPM)The Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in theengine compartment. This module contains fuses andrelays.CAUTION!•When installing the integrated power modulecover, it is important to ensure the cover is prop-erly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do somay allow water to get into the integrated powermodule and possibly result in an electrical systemfailure.•When replacing a blown fuse, it is important touse only a fuse having the correct amperage rating.The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicatedmay result in a dangerous electrical system over-load. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, itindicates a problem in the circuit that must becorrected.Integrated Power ModuleMAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 3297
Cavity CartridgeFuse Mini-Fuse Description1 — 15 AmpBlue Washer Motor2 — 25 AmpNeutral Powertrain Control Mod-ule (PCM)3 — 25 AmpNeutral Ignition Run/Start4 — 25 AmpNeutral EGR Solenoid/Alternator5— ——6 — 25 AmpNeutral Ignition Coils/Injectors7— ——8 — 25 AmpNeutral Starter9— ——10 30 AmpPink — Windshield WiperCavity CartridgeFuse Mini-Fuse Description11 30 AmpPink — Anti-Lock Brake System(ABS) Valves12 40 AmpGreen — Radiator Fan Lo/High13 50 AmpRed — Anti-Lock Brake System(ABS) Pump Motor14 — — —15 50 AmpRed — Radiator Fan16 — — —17 — — —18 — — —19 — — —20 — — —21 — — —22 — — —330 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Power Distribution CenterThere is also a power distribution center located in thetrunk under the spare tire access panel. This centercontains fuses and relays.Access PanelRear Power Distribution CenterMAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 3317
CAUTION!•When installing the power distribution centercover, it is important to ensure the cover is prop-erly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do somay allow water to get into the power distributioncenter and possibly result in an electrical systemfailure.•When replacing a blown fuse, it is important touse only a fuse having the correct amperage rating.The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicatedmay result in a dangerous electrical system over-load. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, itindicates a problem in the circuit that must becorrected.Cavity CartridgeFuse Mini-Fuse Description1 60 AmpYellow — Ignition Off Draw (IOD)2 40 AmpGreen — Integrated Power Module(IPM)3— ——4 40 AmpGreen — Integrated Power Module(IPM)5 30 AmpPink — Heated Seats - ifequipped6 — 20 AmpYellow Fuel Pump7 — 20 AmpYellow Sub Amp - if equipped332 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity CartridgeFuse Mini-Fuse Description8 — 15 AmpBlue Diagnostic Link Connec-tor (DLC)/Wireless Con-trol Module (WCM)/Wireless Ignition Node(WIN)9 — 20 AmpYellow Power Outlet10 — — —11 *———12 *———13 *———14 — 10 AmpRed AC Heater Control/Cluster/Security Module- if equipped15 — — —16 — — —Cavity CartridgeFuse Mini-Fuse Description17 — 20 AmpYellow Cluster18 — 20 AmpYellow Selectable Power Outlet19 — 10 AmpRed Stop Lights20 — — —21 — — —22 — — —23 — — —24 — — —25 — — —26 — — —27 — 10 AmpRed Occupant Restraint Con-troller (ORC)MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 3337
Cavity CartridgeFuse Mini-Fuse Description28 — 10 AmpRed Ignition Run29 — 5 AmpOrange Cluster/Electronic Stabil-ity Program (ESP)/Powertrain Control Mod-ule (PCM)/STOP LIGHTSwitch30 — 10 AmpRed Door Modules/PowerMirrors/Steering ControlModule (SCM)31 — — —32 — — —33 — — —34 — — —35 — 5 AmpOrange Antenna Module - ifequipped/Power MirrorsCavity CartridgeFuse Mini-Fuse Description36 — 20 AmpYellow Hands-Free Phone - ifequipped//Radio37 — 15 AmpBlue Transmission38 — 10 AmpRed Cargo Light/Vehicle In-formation Module - ifequipped39 — 10 AmpRed Heated Mirrors - ifequipped40 — 5 AmpOrange Auto Inside RearviewMirror/Heated Seats - ifequipped/Switch Bank41 — 10 AmpRed AC Heater Control/Headlights/Tire PressureMonitoring - if equipped42 30 AmpPink — Front Blower Motor334 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity CartridgeFuse Mini-Fuse Description43 30 AmpPink — Rear Window Defroster44 20 AmpBlue — Amplifier - if equipped/Sunroof - if equipped*Cavities 11, 12, and 13 contain self-resetting fuses(circuit breakers) that are only serviceable by an autho-rized dealer. The cluster and the driver seat switch arefused by the 25 Amp circuit breaker in cavity 11. Thepassenger seat switch is fused by the 25 Amp circuitbreaker in cavity 12. The door modules, the driver powerwindow switch, and the passenger power windowswitch are fused by the 25 Amp circuit breaker in cavity13. If you experience temporary or permanent loss ofthese systems, see your authorized dealer for service.VEHICLE STORAGEIf you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21days, you may want to take these steps to protect yourbattery.•Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.•Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out ofservice (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run theair conditioning system at idle for about five minutesin the fresh air and high blower setting. This willensure adequate system lubrication to minimize thepossibility of compressor damage when the system isstarted again.MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 3357
REPLACEMENT LIGHT BULBSLIGHT BULBS — Interior Bulb NumberRear Courtesy/Reading Lights..............W5WRear Compartment (Trunk) Light .............562Overhead Console Reading Lights.............578Visor Vanity Lights .....................A6220Glove Box Light .........................194Door Courtesy ..........................562Shift Indicator Light .................JKLE14140Optional Door Map Pocket /Cupholder Lighting ......................LED(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)NOTE: For lighted switches, see your authorized dealerfor replacement instructions.All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glasscartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not approvedand should not be used for replacement.LIGHT BULBS — Exterior Bulb NumberLow Beam Headlight –High Intensity Discharge (HID) ..............D1S(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)High Beam Headlight.....................9005Front Park/Turn Light ...................3157AFront Fog Light......................9145/H10(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)Front Side Marker ........................168Tail Light ............................3057KTail/Stop/Turn Light ....................3057KRear Side Marker ........................168Backup Light ...........................921Center High-Mount Stop Light(CHMSL) .............................LED(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)License................................168336 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
BULB REPLACEMENTLow Beam Headlight, High Beam Headlight, andPark/Turn Light — Models with High IntensityDischarge (HID) HeadlightsHID HeadlightsThe headlights are a type of high voltage discharge tube.High voltage can remain in the circuit even with theHEADLIGHT switch off and the key removed. Becauseof this, you should not attempt to service a headlightbulb yourself. If a headlight bulb fails, take yourvehicle to an authorized dealer for service.WARNING!A transient high tension occurs at the bulb sockets ofHID headlights when the HEADLIGHT switch isturned ON. It may cause serious electrical shock orelectrocution if not serviced properly. See your au-thorized dealer for service.NOTE: On vehicles equipped with HID headlights,when the headlights are turned on, there is a blue hue tothe lights. This diminishes and becomes more white afterapproximately 10 seconds, as the system charges.MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 3377
Front/Rear Side Marker Light1. Remove the front/rear side marker. Use a fiber stick orsimilar tool to gently pry the light on the outboard side todisengage the clip.NOTE:•If a screwdriver is used, make sure a soft material isplaced between the vehicle body and tool so not toscratch the paint.2. Rotate the bulb’s socket counterclockwise, and removethe bulb and socket assembly from the housing.3. Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert the replace-ment bulb.4. Install the bulb and socket assembly into the housing,and rotate the socket clockwise to lock it in place.5. Reinstall the front/rear side marker.Tail/Turn/Stop Light1. Open the trunk.2. Using a screwdriver, remove the tail light retainer.338 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Remove the fasteners from the back of the tail lightassembly.4. Pull back the trunk liner.5. Remove the remaining fasteners from the back of thetail light assembly.6. Pull the tail light assembly clear from the vehicle toaccess the bulbs.7. Push the electrical connector locking tab to the side.8. Disconnect the electrical connector.9. Turn the appropriate bulb and socket assembly coun-terclockwise to remove it from the tail light assembly.10. Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly andinstall the replacement bulb.MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 3397
11. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the taillight assembly, and then turn it clockwise.12. Reinstall the tail light assembly, fasteners, electricalconnector, and trunk liner.13. Close the trunk.Center Tail/Backup LightSee your authorized dealer for bulb replacement.Center High-Mounted Stop Light (CHMSL)The CHMSL uses LED lights that are not serviceableseparately. The CHMSL must be replaced as an assembly,see your authorized dealer.License Light1. Remove the screws securing the light to the rear fascia.2. Remove the bulb and socket assembly.3. Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly andinstall the replacement bulb.4. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly.5. Reattach the light to the rear fascia, and then install thescrews.1 — License Light Bulb2 — Socket340 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUID CAPACITIESU.S. MetricFuel (Approximate) 19 Gallons 72 LitersEngine Oil with Filter6.1 Liter Engine (SAE 0W-40) 7 Quarts 6.6 LitersCooling System *6.1 Liter Engine (MOPARtAntifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 MileFormula) or equivalent 15 Quarts 14.4 Liters* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 3417
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTSEngineComponent Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine PartsEngine Coolant MOPARtAntifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (HybridOrganic Additive Technology) or equivalentEngine Oil (6.1L) For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operatingconditions, the manufacturer only recommends full synthetic engine oils thatmeet the American Petroleum Institute (API) categories of SM or SM/CF, andmeet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-10725. The manu-facturer recommends the use of a full synthetic engine oil, such as Mobil 1tSAE 0W-40 or equivalent. For additional information, refer to the “Engine OilSelection” and “Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade)” in the “Maintenance Pro-cedures” section of this manual.Oil Filter (6.1L) MOPARt05281090 or equivalentSpark Plugs (6.1L) PLZTR5A-13 (Gap.050 in [1.27 mm])Fuel Selection (6.1L) Premium Unleaded 91 Octane Only or higher342 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ChassisComponent Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine PartsAutomatic Transmission MOPARtATF+4 Automatic Transmission FluidBrake Master Cylinder MOPARtDOT 3, SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brakefluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommendedbrake fluids.Power Steering Reservoir MOPARtPower Steering Fluid + 4, MOPARtATF+4 Automatic Transmis-sion FluidRear Axle API GL-5 SAE 75W140 Synthetic Gear Lubricant or equivalentMAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 3437
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULESCONTENTSmEmission Control System Maintenance ........346mMaintenance Schedule ...................346▫Required Maintenance Intervals ...........3488MAINTENANCESCHEDULES
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCEThe Scheduled Maintenance services listed in bold type,must be done at the times or mileages specified to ensurethe continued proper functioning of the Emission ControlSystem. These, and all other maintenance services in-cluded in this manual, should be done to provide bestvehicle performance and reliability. More frequent main-tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operatingconditions, such as dusty areas and very short tripdriving.Inspection and service should also be done anytime amalfunction is suspected.NOTE: Maintenance, replacement, or repair of the emis-sions control devices and systems on your vehicle may beperformed by any automotive repair establishment orindividual using any automotive part that has beencertified pursuant to U.S. EPA or in the State of Califor-nia, California Air Resources Board regulations.MAINTENANCE SCHEDULEThe oil change indicator system will remind you that it istime to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.“Oil Change Required” will be displayed in the Elec-tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) and a singlechime will sound, indicating that an oil change is neces-sary.Based on engine operation conditions, the oil changeindicator message will illuminate. This means that ser-vice is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicleserviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 mi (805km).NOTE:•The oil change indicator message will not monitor thetime since the last oil change. Change your vehicle’soil if it has been six months since your last oil change,even if the oil change indicator message is NOTilluminated.346 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES8MAINTENANCESCHEDULES
•Change your engine oil more often if you drive yourvehicle for an extended period of time.•Under no circumstances should oil change intervalsexceed 6,000 mi (10 000 km) or six months, whichevercomes first.Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicatormessage after completing the scheduled oil change. If thisscheduled oil change is performed by someone otherthan your authorized dealer, the message can be reset byreferring to the steps described under “Oil ChangeRequired” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center(EVIC)” in Section 4.At Each Stop for Fuel•Check the engine oil level. Refer to “Engine Oil” under“Maintenance Procedures” in Section 7.•Check the windshield washer solvent and add ifrequired.Once a Month•Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear ordamage.•Inspect the battery, and clean and tighten the terminalsas required.•Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir and brakemaster cylinder, and add as needed.•Check all lights and other electrical items for correctoperation.At Each Oil Change•Change the engine oil filter.•Inspect the brake hoses and lines.CAUTION!Failure to perform the required maintenance itemsmay result in damage to the vehicle.MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 3478MAINTENANCESCHEDULES
Required Maintenance IntervalsPerform Maintenance Every (Where time and mileageare listed, follow the interval that occurs first.)Maintenance Items Miles Kilometers or MonthsChange the engine oil and engine oil filter. 6,000 10 000 6Rotate the tires. 6,000 10 000 6If using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions,inspect the engine air cleaner filter, and replace if nec-essary. 12,000 20 000 12Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary. 12,000 20 000 12Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped). 12,000 20 000 12Inspect the rear axle fluid. 18,000 30 000 18Inspect the CV joints. Perform the first inspection at12,000 mi (20 000 km) or 12 months. 24,000 40 000 24Inspect the exhaust system. Perform the first inspec-tion at 12,000 mi (20 000 km) or 12 months. 24,000 40 000 24Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and bootseals, and replace if necessary. 24,000 40 000 24348 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES8MAINTENANCESCHEDULES
Perform Maintenance Every (Where time and mileageare listed, follow the interval that occurs first.)Maintenance Items Miles Kilometers or MonthsReplace the engine air cleaner filter. 30,000 50 000 30Change the rear axle fluid if using your vehicle forany of the following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or fre-quent trailer towing. 48,000 80 000 48Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter ifusing your vehicle for any of the following: police,taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing. 60,000 100 000 60Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. † 90,000 150 000 90Flush and replace the engine coolant. 102,000 170 000 60Replace the spark plugs. 102,000 170 000 102Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter. 120,000 200 000 120† This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturerto the owner, but is not required to maintain emissionswarranty.MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 3498MAINTENANCESCHEDULES
WARNING!You can be badly injured working on or around amotor vehicle. Do only that service work for whichyou have the knowledge and the right equipment. Ifyou have any doubt about your ability to perform aservice job, take your vehicle to a competentmechanic.350 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES8MAINTENANCESCHEDULES
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCECONTENTSmSuggestions For Obtaining Service ForYour Vehicle ..........................353▫Prepare For The Appointment ............353▫Prepare A List ........................353▫Be Reasonable With Requests .............353mIf You Need Assistance ...................353▫Chrysler LLC Customer Center ...........354▫Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center ......354▫In Mexico Contact .....................354▫Customer Assistance For The Hearing OrSpeech Impaired (TDD/TTY) .............355▫Service Contract ......................355mWarranty Information (U.S. Vehicles Only) .....356mMOPARtParts .........................356mReporting Safety Defects ..................356▫In The 50 United States AndWashington, D.C. .....................356▫In Canada ..........................357mPublication Order Forms ..................3579
mDepartment Of Transportation Uniform TireQuality Grades ........................358▫Treadwear ..........................359▫Traction Grades ......................359▫Temperature Grades ...................359352 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FORYOUR VEHICLEPrepare For The AppointmentIf you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have theright papers with you. Take your warranty folder. Allwork to be performed may not be covered by thewarranty. Discuss additional charges with the servicemanager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’sservice history. This can often provide a clue to thecurrent problem.Prepare A ListMake a written list of your vehicle’s problems or thespecific work you want done. If you’ve had an accidentor work done that is not on your maintenance log, let theservice advisor know.Be Reasonable With RequestsIf you list a number of items and you must have yourvehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation withthe service advisor and list the items in order of priority.At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rentalvehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, itis advisable to make these arrangements when you callfor an appointment.IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCEThe manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitallyinterested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happywith our products and services.Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to anauthorized selling dealer. They know you and the vehiclebest, and are most concerned that you get prompt andIF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 3539
high quality service. The manufacturer’s authorized deal-ers have the facilities, factory-trained technicians, specialtools, and the latest information to ensure the vehicle isfixed correctly and in a timely manner.This is why you should always talk to an authorizeddealer’s service manager first. Most matters can be re-solved with this process.•If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to thegeneral manager or owner of the authorized dealer-ship. They want to know if you need assistance.•If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve theconcern, you may contact the Manufacturer’s Cus-tomer Center.Any communication to the Manufacturer’s CustomerCenter should include the following information:•Owner’s name and address•Owner’s telephone number (home and office)•Authorized dealership name•Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)•Vehicle delivery date and mileageChrysler LLC Customer CenterP.O. Box 21–8004Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004Phone: (800) 992-1997Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer CenterP.O. Box 1621Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6Phone: (800) 465–2001In Mexico Contact:Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240Sante Fe C.P. 05109Mexico, D. F.In Mexico City: 5081-4568Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300354 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or SpeechImpaired (TDD/TTY)To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, themanufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its CustomerCenter. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, whohas access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with themanufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.Service ContractYou may have purchased a service contract for yourvehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unex-pected repairs after the manufacturer’s New VehicleLimited Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands be-hind only the manufacturer’s Service Contracts. If youpurchased a manufacturer’s Service Contract, you willreceive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Cardin the mail within three weeks of the vehicle deliverydate. If you have any questions about the service con-tract, call the manufacturer’s Service Contract NationalCustomer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922.The manufacturer will not stand behind any servicecontract that is not the manufacturer’s Service Contract. Itis not responsible for any service contract other than themanufacturer’s Service Contract. If you purchased aservice contract that is not a manufacturer’s ServiceContract, and you require service after the manufactur-er’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please referto the contract documents, and contact the person listedin those documents.We appreciate that you have made a major investmentwhen you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer hasalso made a major investment in facilities, tools, andtraining to assure that you are absolutely delighted with theownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their sincereefforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns.IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 3559
WARNING!Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certainvehicle components contain, or emit, chemicalsknown to the State of California to cause cancer andbirth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition,certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain prod-ucts of component wear contain, or emit, chemicalsknown to the State of California to cause cancer andbirth defects or other reproductive harm.WARRANTY INFORMATION (U.S. Vehicles Only)See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms andprovisions of Chrysler LLC warranties applicable to thisvehicle.MOPARTPARTSMOPARtfluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories areavailable from an authorized dealer. They will help keepthe vehicle operating at its best.REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTSIn The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that couldcause a crash or cause injury or death, you shouldimmediately inform the National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying themanufacturer.If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists ina group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedycampaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved inindividual problems between you, your authorizeddealer, and the manufacturer.356 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto SafetyHotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424– 9153),or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administra-tor, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, D.C.20590. You can also obtain other information about motorvehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.In CanadaIf you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, youshould contact the Customer Service Department imme-diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safetydefect to the Canadian government should write to:Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigationsand Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B3V9.PUBLICATION ORDER FORMSTo order the following manuals, you may use either thewebsite or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please callfor an order form.NOTE: A street address is required when orderingmanuals (no P.O. Boxes).•Service ManualsThese comprehensive Service Manuals provide theinformation that students and professional techniciansneed in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,maintaining, servicing, and repairing Chrysler LLCvehicles. A complete working knowledge of the ve-hicle, system, and/or components is written instraightforward language with illustrations, diagrams,and charts.IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 3579
•Diagnostic Procedure ManualsDiagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia-grams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practi-cal manuals make it easy for students and techniciansto find and fix problems on computer-controlled ve-hicle systems and features. They show exactly how tofind and correct problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and drivability procedures,proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all toolsand equipment.•Owner’s ManualsThese Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with theassistance of service and engineering specialists toacquaint you with specific Chrysler LLC vehicles.Included are starting, operating, emergency and main-tenance procedures as well as specifications, capabili-ties and safety tips.Call toll free at:•1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)•1–800–387–1143 (Canada)OrVisit us on the Worldwide Web at:•www.techauthority.comDEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORMTIRE QUALITY GRADESThe following tire grading categories were established bythe National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. Thespecific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturerin each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires onyour vehicle.All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safetyrequirements in addition to these grades.358 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
TreadwearThe Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based onthe wear rate of the tire when tested under controlledconditions on a specified government test course. Forexample, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-halftimes as well on the government course as a tire graded100. The relative performance of tires depends upon theactual conditions of their use, however, and may departsignificantly from the norm due to variations in drivinghabits, service practices, and differences in road charac-teristics and climate.Traction GradesThe Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA,A, B,and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop onwet pavement, as measured under controlled conditionson specified government test surfaces of asphalt andconcrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-mance.WARNING!The traction grade assigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking traction tests, and does notinclude acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, orpeak traction characteristics.Temperature GradesThe temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heatand its ability to dissipate heat, when tested undercontrolled conditions on a specified indoor laboratorytest wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause thematerial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. Thegrade C corresponds to a level of performance, which allpassenger car tires must meet under the Federal MotorIF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 3599
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory testwheel, than the minimum required by law.WARNING!The temperature grade for this tire is established fora tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-ing, either separately or in combination, can causeheat buildup and possible tire failure.360 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
INDEX10
About Your Brakes ....................232,234ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) ............235,238Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ..........316Adding Fuel ...........................274Adding Washer Fluid ..................124,312Additives, Fuel .........................272Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 304Air Conditioner Maintenance ...............309Air Conditioning ........................203Air Conditioning Controls .................203Air Conditioning Filter .................208,310Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ............209Air Conditioning Refrigerant .............309,310Air Conditioning System ................203,309Air Pressure, Tires ....................156,255Airbag ................................46Airbag Deployment .....................51,53Airbag Light .....................52,55,70,152Airbag Maintenance .......................55Airbag, Side ..........................47,53Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) .............47,53Alarm, Panic ............................25Alarm (Security Alarm) .................18,156Alarm System (Security Alarm) ...............18Alignment and Balance ...................261Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle .............7Antenna, Satellite Radio ...................196Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ...........315,316,341Disposal ............................317Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ............235,238Anti-Lock Warning Light ...............158,236Anti-Theft Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) ........18Anti-Theft System .......................156Appearance Care ........................324Arming Theft System (Security Alarm) .........18Assistance Towing ........................91Audio Systems (Radio) ....................191Auto Down Power Windows ................34362 INDEX
Auto Unlock, Doors .......................31Automatic Dimming Mirror .................75Automatic Door Locks .....................31Automatic Headlights .....................117Automatic TransaxleSpecial Additives ......................324Automatic Transmission .............223,322,323Adding Fluid ......................323,343Autostick ............................228Fluid and Filter Changes .................323Fluid Change .........................323Fluid Level Check ......................322Fluid Type ...........................343Shifting .............................223Special Additives ......................324Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode . . 226,227Autostick .............................228Axle Fluid .............................343Axle Lubrication (Axle Fluid) ...............343Ball Joints .............................311Battery ...............................307Emergency Starting .....................286Jump Starting .........................286Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) .......25Location ..........................287,307Bearings ..............................324Belts, Drive ............................303Belts, Seat ............................38,69Body Mechanism Lubrication ...............311B-Pillar Location ........................250Brake Assist System ......................239Brake Control System, Electronic .............238Brake Fluid ............................343Brake, Parking ..........................232Brake System ........................234,320Anti-Lock (ABS) ....................235,238Fluid Check .......................321,343Hoses ..............................320INDEX 36310
Master Cylinder .......................321Parking .............................232Warning Light .....................155,234Brakes .............................234,320Brake/Transmission Interlock ...............222Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle ........67Brightness, Interior Lights ..................121Bulb Replacement .....................336,337Bulbs, Light ..........................70,336Calibration, Compass .....................169Capacities, Fluid ........................341Caps, FillerFuel ................................274Oil (Engine) ..........................302Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ...............316Car Washes ............................325Carbon Monoxide Warning ...............68,273Cargo (Vehicle Loading) ...................276Catalytic Converter ......................305CD (Compact Disc) Player .................191Cellular Phone .....................78,191,192Center High Mounted Stop Light ............340Certification Label .......................276Chains, Tire ............................261Chart, Tire Sizing ........................247Check Engine Light (Malfunction IndicatorLight) ................................298Checking Your Vehicle For Safety .............68Checks, Safety ...........................68Child Restraint ..................58,59,60,62,64Child Restraint Tether Anchors .............61,62Clean Air Gasoline .......................270CleaningWheels .............................326Windshield Wiper Blades .................312Climate Control .........................203Clock .............................178,193364 INDEX
Cold Weather Operation ...................217Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance .............202Compass ..............................169Compass Calibration .....................169Compass Variance .......................170Computer, Trip/Travel ....................163Console ..............................143Console, Floor ..........................143Console, Overhead .......................129Contract, Service ........................355Converter, Catalytic ......................305Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ..........316Cooling System .........................314Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ..............316Coolant Capacity ......................341Coolant Level ......................314,317Disposal of Used Coolant ................317Drain, Flush, and Refill ..................315Inspection ...........................317Points to Remember ....................318Pressure Cap .........................316Radiator Cap .........................316Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) ......315,341,342Corrosion Protection .....................324Cruise Control (Speed Control) ..............126Cruise Light ...........................150Cup Holder .........................142,328Customer Assistance .....................353Data Recorder, Event ......................56Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights ...........121Daytime Running Lights ...................118Dealer Service ..........................300Deck Lid, Emergency Release ................36Deck Lid, Power Release ...................35Defroster, Rear Window ...................144Defroster, Windshield ...................70,205Delay (Intermittent) Wipers .................122INDEX 36510
Diagnostic System, Onboard ................297Digital Video Disc (DVD) Player .............191Dimmer Switch, Headlight .................120DipsticksOil (Engine) ..........................301Disabled Vehicle Towing ...................291DisposalAntifreeze (Engine Coolant) ...............317Engine Oil ...........................303Door Locks .............................29Door Locks, Automatic ....................31Door Opener, Garage .....................130Drive Belts ............................303DrivingOn Slippery Surfaces ....................229Through Flowing, Rising, or ShallowStanding Water ........................230Electric Remote Mirrors ....................76Electrical Power Outlets ...................140Electronic Brake Control System .............238Electronic Power Distribution Center (Fuses) ....331Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ......126Electronic Stability Program (ESP) ............240Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light ......151Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) ....159Emergency Deck Lid Release ................36Emergency, In Case ofFreeing Vehicle When Stuck ...............289Hazard Warning Flasher .................280Jump Starting .........................286Overheating ..........................280Towing .............................291Emergency Trunk Release ...................36Emission Control System Maintenance ......298,346Engine ...............................296Air Cleaner ..........................304Block Heater .........................219366 INDEX
Break-In Recommendations ................67Checking Oil Level .....................301Compartment .........................296Coolant (Antifreeze) .................314,342Cooling .............................314Exhaust Gas Caution ..................68,273Fails to Start ..........................218Flooded, Starting ......................218Fuel Requirements .....................270Jump Starting .........................286Oil ...........................301,341,342Oil Change Interval ....................301Oil Filler Cap .........................302Oil Filter ............................303Oil Filter Disposal ......................303Oil Selection .......................302,341Overheating ..........................280Starting .............................214Temperature Gauge .....................151Engine Oil Viscosity ......................302Enhanced Accident Response Feature ..........54Entry System, Illuminated ..................20Ethanol ...............................271Event Data Recorder ......................56Exhaust Gas Caution ................68,273,313Exhaust System .......................68,313Exterior Folding Mirrors ...................76Exterior Lighting ........................116Exterior Lights ..........................70Filler Location Fuel ......................274FiltersAir Cleaner ..........................304Air Conditioning ....................208,310Engine Fuel ..........................304Engine Oil ........................303,342Engine Oil Disposal ....................303INDEX 36710
FlashersHazard Warning .......................280Turn Signal ......................70,119,152Flash-To-Pass ...........................120Flooded Engine Starting ...................218Fluid, Brake ...........................343Fluid Capacities .........................341Fluid Leaks .............................70Fluid Level ChecksAutomatic Transmission .................322Brake ...............................321Cooling System .......................314Engine Oil ...........................301Power Steering ........................310Fluids ................................342Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts ..........342Fog Lights ..........................118,154Folding Rear Seat ........................113Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ...................289Front Suspension Ball Joints ................311Front Wheel Bearings .....................324Fuel .................................270Adding .............................274Additives ............................272Clean Air ............................270Ethanol .............................271Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ....................274Filter ...............................304Gasoline ............................270Gauge ..............................150Hoses ..............................319Materials Added .......................272Methanol ............................271Octane Rating ......................270,342Requirements .........................270Specifications .........................342Tank Capacity ........................341Fuel System Caution .....................274368 INDEX
Fueling ...............................274Fuses ................................329Garage Door Opener (HomeLinkt) ...........130Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ...............274,297Gasoline, Clean Air ......................270Gasoline (Fuel) .........................270Gasoline, Reformulated ...................270GaugesCoolant Temperature ....................151Fuel ................................150Speedometer .........................150Tachometer ..........................150General Information ............18,26,104,229,269General Maintenance .....................300Glass Cleaning ..........................327Gross Axle Weight Rating ..................276Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ................276GVWR ...............................276Hands-Free Phone (UConnect™) ........78,191,192Hard Drive (HDD) .......................191HazardDriving Through Flowing, Rising, or ShallowStanding Water ........................230Hazard Warning Flasher ...................280Head Restraints .........................111Headlight Washers .......................312Headlights ............................337Automatic ...........................117Bulb Replacement ......................337Cleaning ............................327Delay ...............................117High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ........120Lights On Reminder ....................118On With Wipers ....................117,124Passing .............................120Switch ..............................116Time Delay ...........................117INDEX 36910
Washers .............................312Heated Mirrors ..........................77Heated Seats ...........................112Heater ...............................203Heater, Engine Block .....................219High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . 120Holder, Cup ...........................142HomeLinkt(Garage Door Opener) Transmitter . . . 130Hood Release ..........................114Hoses ................................319Ignition ...............................14Key...............................12,14Ignition Key Removal .....................14Illuminated Entry ........................20Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ...................15Infant Restraint ..........................58Inflation Pressure Tires ....................156Information Center, Vehicle .................159Instrument Cluster ....................149,150Instrument Panel and Controls ..............148Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning .............328Integrated Power Module (Fuses) ............329Interior Appearance Care ..................326Interior Lights ..........................121Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ...........122Introduction .............................4Jump Starting ..........................286Key, Programming ........................17Key, Replacement ........................16Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) ...................15Key-In Reminder .........................15Keyless Entry System ......................21Keyless Go ..........................12,216Keys .................................12Kicker Sound System .....................200370 INDEX
Knee Bolster ............................46Lane Change and Turn Signals ..............119Lap/Shoulder Belts .......................38LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tetherfor CHildren) .........................61,62Latch Plate .............................39Latches ................................70Hood ...............................114Lead Free Gasoline ......................270Leaks, Fluid ............................70Life of Tires ............................259Light Bulbs ..........................70,336Lights ..............................70,116Airbag ........................52,55,70,152Anti-Lock .........................158,236Automatic Headlights ...................117Brake Assist Warning ...................244Brake Warning .....................155,234Bulb Replacement ...................336,337Center Mounted Stop ...................340Courtesy/Reading ...................120,129Cruise ..............................150Daytime Running ......................118Dimmer Switch, Headlight .............119,120Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . . 244Electronic Throttle Control Warning .........151Engine Temperature Warning ..............152Exterior ..............................70Fog .............................118,154Hazard Warning Flasher .................280Headlight Switch ......................116Headlights ........................116,337Headlights On Reminder .................118Headlights On With Wipers ............117,124High Beam ........................120,153High Beam Indicator ....................153High Beam/Low Beam Select .............120INDEX 37110
Illuminated Entry .......................20Instrument Cluster ..................116,150Intensity Control .......................121Interior ..........................121,129License .............................340Lights On Reminder ....................118Low Fuel ............................158LowTire ............................156Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ........158Map Reading ......................120,129Oil Pressure ..........................153Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) ..........121Passing .............................120Reading ..........................120,129Seat Belt Reminder .....................154Service ...........................336,337Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . 158Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) ........156,264Traction Control .......................244Turn Signal ......................70,119,152Vanity Mirror ..........................77Voltage .............................150Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) .....150Loading Vehicle ......................276,277Capacities ...........................277Tires ...............................250Locks .................................29Auto Unlock ..........................31Automatic Door ........................31Door ................................29Power Door ...........................30Low Tire Pressure System ..................264Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren(LATCH) ............................61,62Lubrication, Body .......................311Lumbar Support ........................111372 INDEX
Maintenance Free Battery ..................307Maintenance, General .....................300Maintenance Procedures ...................300Maintenance Schedule ....................346Maintenance, Sunroof .....................139Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . 158,298Manual, Service .........................357Map/Reading Lights ..................120,129Master Cylinder (Brakes) ..................321Methanol .............................271Mini-Trip Computer ......................163Mirrors ................................75Automatic Dimming .....................75Electric Powered .......................76Electric Remote ........................76Exterior Folding ........................76Heated ..............................77Outside ..............................75Vanity ...............................77Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle .............7Monitor, Tire Pressure System ...............264Mopar Parts .........................299,356MP3 Player ............................191MTBE/ETBE ...........................271Multi-Function Control Lever ...............119Navigation Radio ........................191Navigation System .......................191New Vehicle Break-In Period ................67Occupant Restraints .......................37Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ............270,342Odometer .............................150Trip ................................150Oil Change Indicator .....................162Oil Change Indicator, Reset .................162Oil, Engine .........................301,342Capacity ............................341INDEX 37310
Change Interval .......................301Checking ............................301Dipstick .............................301Disposal ............................303Filter ............................303,342Filter Disposal ........................303Materials Added to .....................303Recommendation ...................302,341Viscosity ..........................302,341Oil Filter, Change ........................303Oil Filter, Selection .......................303Onboard Diagnostic System ..............297,298Opener, Garage Door (HomeLinkt) ...........130Operating Precautions ....................297Outside Rearview Mirrors ..................75Overhead Console .......................129Overheating, Engine ......................280Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) ..........357Paint Care .............................324Panic Alarm ............................25Parking Brake ..........................232Parking On Hill .........................233Passing Light ...........................120Personal Settings ........................172Pets ..................................67Phone, Cellular ....................78,191,192Phone, Hands-Free (UConnect™) ........78,191,192Placard, Tire and Loading Information .........250PortUniversal Serial Bus (USB) ................191USB................................191PowerBrakes ..............................234Deck Lid Release .......................35Distribution Center (Fuses) ...............331Door Locks ...........................30374 INDEX
Mirrors ..............................76Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ..........140Seats ...............................109Steering .............................237Steering, Checking .....................310Sunroof .............................136Windows .............................33Power Steering Fluid ..................310,343Pregnant Women and Seat Belts ..............45PretensionersSeat Belts .............................43Programmable Electronic Features ............172Programming Transmitters (Remote KeylessEntry) .................................21Radial Ply Tires .........................257Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ..........316Radio Broadcast Signals ...................175Radio, Navigation .......................191Radio Operation ......................192,202Radio Remote Controls ....................201Radio, Satellite ....................191,192,195Radio (Sound Systems) ....................191Rear Cup Holder ........................142Rear Seat, Folding .......................113Rear Wheel Bearings .....................324Rear Window Defroster ...................144Rear Window Features ....................144Reception, Radio ........................175Recorder, Event Data ......................56Recreational Towing ......................278Reformulated Gasoline ....................270Refrigerant ............................310Release, Hood ..........................114Reminder, Lights On .....................118Reminder, Seat Belt .......................43Remote ControlStarting System ........................27INDEX 37510
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) .................21Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls ........201Remote Starting System ....................27Remote Trunk Release .....................35Replacement Bulbs .......................336Replacement Keys ........................16Replacement Parts .......................299Replacement Tires .......................260Reporting Safety Defects ...................356Restraint, Head .........................111Restraints, Child .........................58Restraints, Occupant ......................37Rocking Vehicle When Stuck ................289Rotation, Tires ..........................262Safety Checks Inside Vehicle .................69Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ...............70Safety Defects, Reporting ..................356Safety, Exhaust Gas .......................68Safety Information, Tire ...................245Safety Tips .............................68Satellite Radio ....................191,192,195Satellite Radio Antenna ...................196Schedule, Maintenance ....................346Seat Belt Maintenance ....................328Seat Belt Reminder .......................43Seat Belts ..........................37,38,69And Pregnant Women ...................45Child Restraint .....................58,60,64Extender .............................45Front Seat ..........................38,39Inspection ............................69Operating Instructions ...................39Pretensioners ..........................43Rear Seat .............................38Reminder ............................154Untwisting Procedure ....................42376 INDEX
Seats .................................109Adjustment ..........................109Head Restraints .......................111Heated ..............................112Height Adjustment .....................109Lumbar Support .......................111Power ..............................109Rear Folding .........................113Seatback Release .......................113Tilting ..............................109Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) .............18,156Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) ..........315,342Selection of Oil .........................302Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ...................15Sentry Key Programming ...................17Sentry Key Replacement ...................16Service Assistance .......................353Service Contract .........................355Service Engine Soon Light (MalfunctionIndicator) .............................158Service Manuals ........................357Setting the Clock .....................178,193Settings, Personal ........................172Shifting ...............................220Automatic Transmission ...............220,223Shoulder Belts ...........................38Side Airbag ...........................47,53Side Curtain (Window Airbag) ...............47Side Window Demisters (Defrosters) ..........207Signals, Turn ......................70,119,152Slippery Surfaces, Driving On ...............229Snow Chains (Tire Chains) .................261Snow Tires ............................262Sound SystemKicker ..............................200Sound Systems (Radio) ....................191INDEX 37710
Spark Plugs .........................304,342SpecificationsFuel (Gasoline) ........................342Oil ................................342Speed Control (Cruise Control) ..............126Speedometer ...........................150Starting .............................27,214Automatic Transmission .................215Cold Weather .........................217Emergency (Jump Starting) ...............286Engine Fails to Start ....................218Remote ..............................27Starting and Operating ....................214Starting Procedures ......................214SteeringColumn Controls ......................119Column Lock .........................125Linkage .............................311Power ...........................237,310Tilt Column ..........................125Wheel, Tilt ...........................125Steering Wheel Mounted Sound SystemControls ..............................201Storage ...............................335Storage, Vehicle ......................207,335Storing Your Vehicle ......................335Stuck, Freeing ..........................289Sun Roof ..............................136Sunglasses Storage .......................130Sunroof Maintenance .....................139Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag ........46System, Navigation ......................191System, Remote Starting ....................27Tachometer ............................150Telescoping Steering Column ...............125Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant .......151,281Tether Anchor, Child Restraint ...............61378 INDEX
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) ................18Theft System (Security Alarm) ...............18Tilt Steering Column .....................125Time Delay, Headlight ....................117Tire and Loading Information Placard .........250Tire Identification Number (TIN) .............249Tire Markings ..........................245Tire Safety Information ....................245TIREFIT ..............................281Tires ............................70,254,358Aging (Life of Tires) ....................259Air Pressure ..........................254Alignment ...........................261Chains ..............................261General Information ....................254High Speed ..........................257Inflation Pressures .....................255Life of Tires ..........................259Load Capacity .....................250,251Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ...........264Quality Grading .......................358Radial ..............................257Replacement .........................260Rotation .............................262Safety ...........................245,254Sizes ...............................247Snow Tires ...........................262Spinning ............................258Tread Wear Indicators ...................258To Open Hood ..........................114Towing ...............................27824-Hour Towing Assistance ................91Behind a Motor Home ..................278Disabled Vehicle .......................291Recreational ..........................278Towing Assistance ........................91Towing Vehicle Behind a Motor Home .........278Traction Control .........................239INDEX 37910
Trailer Towing ..........................278Transmission ...........................322Automatic ......................220,223,322Fluid ...............................343Shifting .............................220Transmitter Battery Service (Remote KeylessEntry) .................................25Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLinkt) . . 130Transmitter Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . 21Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ........21Transporting Pets ........................67Tread Wear Indicators ....................258Trip Odometer ..........................150Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) ....................35,36Trunk Release, Emergency ..................36Trunk Release Remote Control ...............35Turn Signals .........................119,152UConnect™ (Hands-Free Phone) ...........78,191Uniform Tire Quality Grades ................358Universal Serial Bus (USB) Port ..............191Universal Transmitter .....................130Unleaded Gasoline .......................270Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ..............42USB Port ..............................191Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses .................319Vanity Mirrors ...........................77Variance, Compass .......................170Vehicle Certification Label .................276Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ............6Vehicle Loading ...................251,276,277Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ..............7Vehicle Storage .......................207,335Vehicle Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) ..........18380 INDEX
Viscosity, Engine Oil ......................302Voice Recognition System (VR) ..............104Warning Flasher, Hazard ..................280Warning Lights (Instrument ClusterDescription) ...........................150Warnings and Cautions .....................6Warranty Information .....................356Washer, Adding Fluid ..................124,312Washers, Windshield ................122,123,312Washing Vehicle .........................325WaterDriving Through ......................230Wheel Alignment and Balance ...............261Wheel and Wheel Trim ....................326Wheel and Wheel Trim Care ................326Wheel Bearings .........................324Wind Buffeting .......................34,139Window Airbag (Side Curtain) .............47,53Window Fogging ........................207Windows ..............................33Power ...............................33Windshield Defroster ...................70,205Windshield Washers ................122,123,312Fluid ...............................312Windshield Wiper Blades ..................312Windshield Wipers .......................122Wiper Blade Replacement ..................312Wiper, Delay ...........................122Wipers, Intermittent ......................122INDEX 38110
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTINGEQUIPMENTSpecial design considerations are incorporated into thisvehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radiofrequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephoneequipment must be installed properly by trained person-nel. The following must be observed during installation.The positive power connection should be made directlyto the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.The negative power connection should be made to bodysheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.This connection should not be fused.Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on theroof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be usedin mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets mayaffect the accuracy or operation of the compass onvehicles so equipped.The antenna cable should be as short as practical androuted away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Useonly fully shielded coaxial cable.Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio toensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).Mobile radio equipment with output power greater thannormal may require special precautions.All installations should be checked for possible interfer-ence between the communications equipment and thevehicle’s electronic systems.
Charger SRT8OWNER’S MANUAL20082008 Charger SRT881-226-0821 First Edition Printed in U.S.A.

Navigation menu